Xseries 3400 M3 7379

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 346

IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379

Problem Determination and Service Guide

IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379


Problem Determination and Service Guide

Note: Before using this information and the product it supports, read the general information in Appendix B, Notices, on page 311,
and the IBM Safety Information, Environmental Notices and User Guide documents on the IBM Documentation CD, and the
Warranty Information document that comes with the server.
Eighth Edition (November 2011)
Copyright IBM Corporation 2011.
US Government Users Restricted Rights Use, duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract
with IBM Corp.
Contents
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
Guidelines for trained service technicians . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Inspecting for unsafe conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Safety statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Chapter 1. Start here. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Diagnosing a problem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Undocumented problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Chapter 2. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Related documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Notices and statements in this document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Features and specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Server controls, LEDs, and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
System board internal connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
System board switches and jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
System board LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
System board external connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Hard disk drive backplane connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Chapter 3. Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Diagnostic tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Event logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing event logs without restarting the server . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
POST error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
System-event log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Integrated management module error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
About the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Performing the checkout procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Troubleshooting tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
DVD drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
General problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Hard disk drive problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Hypervisor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Intermittent problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Memory problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Microprocessor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Monitor problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Optional-device problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Serial port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ServerGuide problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Software problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Light path diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Power-supply LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 iii
Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Running the diagnostic programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Diagnostic text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Viewing the test log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Diagnostic messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Recovering from an IBM System x Server Firmware update failure . . . . . 122
Solving power problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Solving Ethernet controller problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Solving undetermined problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Problem determination tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379 . . . . . . . 127
Replaceable server components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Power cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components . . . . . . . . 135
Installation guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
System reliability guidelines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Working inside the server with the power on . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Handling static-sensitive devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Returning a device or component . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Opening the bezel media door. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Closing the bezel media door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Opening the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Closing the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Removing a ServeRAID adapter battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Installing a ServeRAID adapter battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Internal cable routing and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Tape drive cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
DVD drive cable connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Operator information panel cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Hard disk drive cable connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Removing and replacing Tier 1 CRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Removing the left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Installing the left-side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Removing and installing drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Removing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Installing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Removing a simple-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Installing a simple-swap hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Removing a hot-swap fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Installing a hot-swap fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Removing a DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Installing a DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Removing the air baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Installing the air baffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Removing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Installing an adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Removing the rear adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Installing the rear adapter-retention bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Removing the operator information panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . 205
iv IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the operator information panel assembly . . . . . . . . . . 207
Removing a voltage regulator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Installing a voltage regulator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Installing memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device . . . . . . . . . 219
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device . . . . . . . . . . 221
Removing an optional ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key . . . . . 221
Installing an optional ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key . . . . . 223
Removing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Installing the bezel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Removing the fan cage assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Installing the fan cage assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Removing an optional tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Installing an optional tape drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Removing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly . . . . . . 235
Installing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly . . . . . . 237
Removing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Installing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Removing the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane . . . . . . . 242
Installing the 3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Removing the simple-swap backplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Installing the simple-swap backplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Removing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Installing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Removing and replacing FRUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Removing the upper 3.5-inch disk drive cage . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Installing the upper 3.5-inch disk drive cage. . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Turning the stabilizing feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Removing a hot-swap power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Installing a hot-swap power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Removing the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Installing the power-supply cage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Removing an extender card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Installing an extender card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Removing a microprocessor and heat sink . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Installing a microprocessor and heat sink. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Removing a heat-sink retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Installing a heat-sink retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Removing a microprocessor retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Installing a microprocessor retention module . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Removing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Installing the system board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions . . . . . . . . 285
Updating the firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Using the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Starting the Setup utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Setup utility menu choices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Passwords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Using the Boot Selection Menu program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Starting the backup server firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD. . . . . . . . . . . . 292
ServerGuide features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Setup and configuration overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Typical operating-system installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Installing your operating system without using ServerGuide . . . . . . . 294
Contents v
Changing the Power Policy option to the default settings after loading UEFI
defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Using the integrated management module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Using the embedded hypervisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture . . . . . . . 297
Enabling the remote presence feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Obtaining the IP address for the Web interface access. . . . . . . . . 298
Logging on to the Web interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility. . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Using the LSI Configuration Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Formatting a hard disk drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
IBM Advanced Settings Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Updating IBM Systems Director . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance . . . . . . . . . . 309
Before you call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Using the documentation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . 309
Software service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Hardware service and support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
IBM Taiwan product service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Appendix B. Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Trademarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Important notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Particulate contamination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Documentation format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Telecommunication regulatory statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Electronic emission notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement . . . . . . . . 314
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement . . . . . . . . 314
Avis de conformit la rglementation d'Industrie Canada . . . . . . . 314
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement . . . . . . . . 315
Germany Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
VCCI Class A statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)
statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Korean Class A warning statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A statement . . . . . . 317
People's Republic of China Class A electronic emission statement . . . . 317
Taiwan Class A compliance statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
vi IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Safety
Before installing this product, read the Safety Information.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informaes de Segurana.
Ls sikkerhedsforskrifterne, fr du installerer dette produkt.
Lees voordat u dit product installeert eerst de veiligheidsvoorschriften.
Ennen kuin asennat tmn tuotteen, lue turvaohjeet kohdasta Safety Information.
Avant d'installer ce produit, lisez les consignes de scurit.
Vor der Installation dieses Produkts die Sicherheitshinweise lesen.
Prima di installare questo prodotto, leggere le Informazioni sulla Sicurezza.
Les sikkerhetsinformasjonen (Safety Information) fr du installerer dette produktet.
Antes de instalar este produto, leia as Informaes sobre Segurana.
Antes de instalar este producto, lea la informacin de seguridad.
Ls skerhetsinformationen innan du installerar den hr produkten.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 vii
Guidelines for trained service technicians
This section contains information for trained service technicians.
Inspecting for unsafe conditions
Use the information in this section to help you identify potential unsafe conditions in
an IBM product that you are working on. Each IBM product, as it was designed and
manufactured, has required safety items to protect users and service technicians
from injury. The information in this section addresses only those items. Use good
judgment to identify potential unsafe conditions that might be caused by non-IBM
alterations or attachment of non-IBM features or options that are not addressed in
this section. If you identify an unsafe condition, you must determine how serious the
hazard is and whether you must correct the problem before you work on the
product.
Consider the following conditions and the safety hazards that they present:
v Electrical hazards, especially primary power. Primary voltage on the frame can
cause serious or fatal electrical shock.
v Explosive hazards, such as a damaged CRT face or a bulging capacitor.
v Mechanical hazards, such as loose or missing hardware.
To inspect the product for potential unsafe conditions, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the power is off and the power cord is disconnected.
2. Make sure that the exterior cover is not damaged, loose, or broken, and
observe any sharp edges.
3. Check the power cord:
v Make sure that the third-wire ground connector is in good condition. Use a
meter to measure third-wire ground continuity for 0.1 ohm or less between
the external ground pin and the frame ground.
v Make sure that the power cord is the correct type, as specified in Power
cords on page 131.
v Make sure that the insulation is not frayed or worn.
4. Remove the cover.
5. Check for any obvious non-IBM alterations. Use good judgment as to the safety
of any non-IBM alterations.
6. Check inside the server for any obvious unsafe conditions, such as metal filings,
contamination, water or other liquid, or signs of fire or smoke damage.
7. Check for worn, frayed, or pinched cables.
8. Make sure that the power-supply cover fasteners (screws or rivets) have not
been removed or tampered with.
viii IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Guidelines for servicing electrical equipment
Observe the following guidelines when servicing electrical equipment:
v Check the area for electrical hazards such as moist floors, nongrounded power
extension cords, power surges, and missing safety grounds.
v Use only approved tools and test equipment. Some hand tools have handles that
are covered with a soft material that does not provide insulation from live
electrical currents.
v Regularly inspect and maintain your electrical hand tools for safe operational
condition. Do not use worn or broken tools or testers.
v Do not touch the reflective surface of a dental mirror to a live electrical circuit.
The surface is conductive and can cause personal injury or equipment damage if
it touches a live electrical circuit.
v Some rubber floor mats contain small conductive fibers to decrease electrostatic
discharge. Do not use this type of mat to protect yourself from electrical shock.
v Do not work alone under hazardous conditions or near equipment that has
hazardous voltages.
v Locate the emergency power-off (EPO) switch, disconnecting switch, or electrical
outlet so that you can turn off the power quickly in the event of an electrical
accident.
v Disconnect all power before you perform a mechanical inspection, work near
power supplies, or remove or install main units.
v Before you work on the equipment, disconnect the power cord. If you cannot
disconnect the power cord, have the customer power-off the wall box that
supplies power to the equipment and lock the wall box in the off position.
v Never assume that power has been disconnected from a circuit. Check it to
make sure that it has been disconnected.
v If you have to work on equipment that has exposed electrical circuits, observe
the following precautions:
Make sure that another person who is familiar with the power-off controls is
near you and is available to turn off the power if necessary.
When you are working with powered-on electrical equipment, use only one
hand. Keep the other hand in your pocket or behind your back to avoid
creating a complete circuit that could cause an electrical shock.
When you use a tester, set the controls correctly and use the approved probe
leads and accessories for that tester.
Stand on a suitable rubber mat to insulate you from grounds such as metal
floor strips and equipment frames.
v Use extreme care when you measure high voltages.
v To ensure proper grounding of components such as power supplies, pumps,
blowers, fans, and motor generators, do not service these components outside of
their normal operating locations.
v If an electrical accident occurs, use caution, turn off the power, and send another
person to get medical aid.
Safety ix
Safety statements
Important:
Each caution and danger statement in this document is labeled with a number. This
number is used to cross reference an English-language caution or danger
statement with translated versions of the caution or danger statement in the Safety
Information document.
For example, if a caution statement is labeled "Statement 1," translations for that
caution statement are in the Safety Information document under "Statement 1."
Be sure to read all caution and danger statements in this document before you
perform the procedures. Read any additional safety information that comes with the
server or optional device before you install the device.
Attention: Use No. 26 AWG or larger UL-listed or CSA certified
telecommunication line cord.
x IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 1:
DANGER
Electrical current from power, telephone, and communication cables is
hazardous.
To avoid a shock hazard:
v Do not connect or disconnect any cables or perform installation,
maintenance, or reconfiguration of this product during an electrical
storm.
v Connect all power cords to a properly wired and grounded electrical
outlet.
v Connect to properly wired outlets any equipment that will be attached to
this product.
v When possible, use one hand only to connect or disconnect signal
cables.
v Never turn on any equipment when there is evidence of fire, water, or
structural damage.
v Disconnect the attached power cords, telecommunications systems,
networks, and modems before you open the device covers, unless
instructed otherwise in the installation and configuration procedures.
v Connect and disconnect cables as described in the following table when
installing, moving, or opening covers on this product or attached
devices.
To Connect: To Disconnect:
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, attach all cables to devices.
3. Attach signal cables to connectors.
4. Attach power cords to outlet.
5. Turn device ON.
1. Turn everything OFF.
2. First, remove power cords from outlet.
3. Remove signal cables from connectors.
4. Remove all cables from devices.
Safety xi
Statement 2:
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100C (212F)
v Repair or disassemble
Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations.
xii IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 3:
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic devices, or
transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product could
result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no serviceable
parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than
those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation exposure.
DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B laser
diode. Note the following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view directly
with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the beam.
Class 1 Laser Product
Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1
`
Safety xiii
Statement 4:
18 kg (39.7 lb) 32 kg (70.5 lb) 55 kg (121.2 lb)
CAUTION:
Use safe practices when lifting.
Statement 5:
CAUTION:
The power control button on the device and the power switch on the power
supply do not turn off the electrical current supplied to the device. The device
also might have more than one power cord. To remove all electrical current
from the device, ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power
source.
1
2
xiv IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Statement 8:
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.
Statement 11:
CAUTION:
The following label indicates sharp edges, corners, or joints nearby.
Statement 12:
CAUTION:
The following label indicates a hot surface nearby.
Safety xv
Statement 13:
DANGER
Overloading a branch circuit is potentially a fire hazard and a shock hazard
under certain conditions. To avoid these hazards, ensure that your system
electrical requirements do not exceed branch circuit protection
requirements. Refer to the information that is provided with your device for
electrical specifications.
Statement 15:
CAUTION:
Make sure that the rack is secured properly to avoid tipping when the server
unit is extended.
Statement 17:
CAUTION:
The following label indicates moving parts nearby.
Statement 26:
CAUTION:
Do not place any object on top of rack-mounted devices.
Attention: This server is suitable for use on an IT power distribution system
whose maximum phase-to-phase voltage is 240 V under any distribution fault
condition.
xvi IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 1. Start here
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures in this Problem Determination and Service Guide and
on the IBM Web site. This document describes the diagnostic tests that you can
perform, troubleshooting procedures, and explanations of error messages and error
codes. The documentation that comes with your operating system and software
also contains troubleshooting information.
Diagnosing a problem
Before you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider, follow these
procedures in the order in which they are presented to diagnose a problem with
your server:
1. Determine what has changed.
Determine whether any of the following items were added, removed, replaced,
or updated before the problem occurred:
v IBM System x Server Firmware (server firmware)
v Device drivers
v Firmware
v Hardware components
v Software
If possible, return the server to the condition it was in before the problem
occurred.
2. Collect data.
Thorough data collection is necessary for diagnosing hardware and software
problems.
a. Document error codes and system board LEDs.
v System error codes: See Viewing the test log on page 86 for
information about error codes.
v Software or operating-system error codes: See the documentation for
the software or operating system for information about a specific error
code. See the manufacturer's Web site for documentation.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs: See Light path diagnostics on page 78
for information about light path diagnostics LEDs that are lit.
v System board LEDs: See System board LEDs on page 19 for
information about system board LEDs that are lit.
Light path diagnostics on page 78
b. Collect system data.
Run Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to collect information about the
hardware, firmware, software, and operating system. Have this information
available when you contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider.
For instructions for running the DSA program, see Running the diagnostic
programs on page 85.
If you have to download the latest version of DSA , go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-DSA or complete the
following steps.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 1
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4) Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA).
For information about DSA command-line options, go to
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/
com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/erep_tools_dsa.html or complete the following
steps:
1) Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2) In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools
Center.
3) Click Tools reference > Error reporting and analysis tools > IBM
Dynamic System Analysis.
3. Follow the problem-resolution procedures.
The four problem-resolution procedures are presented in the order in which they
are most likely to solve your problem. Follow these procedures in the order in
which they are presented:
a. Check for and apply code updates.
Most problems that appear to be caused by faulty hardware are actually
caused by IBM System x Server Firmware (server firmware), system
firmware, device firmware, or device drivers that are not at the latest levels.
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or
coordinated code updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is supported for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
1) Determine the existing code levels.
In DSA, click Firmware/VPD to view system firmware levels, or click
Software to view operating-system levels.
2) Download and install updates of code that is not at the latest level.
To display a list of available updates for your server, go
tohttp://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=MIGR-4JT or complete the
following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
d) Click System x3400 M3 to display the list of downloadable files for
the server.
You can install code updates that are packaged as an UpdateXpress
System Pack or UpdateXpress CD image. An UpdateXpress System
Pack contains an integration-tested bundle of online firmware and
device-driver updates for your server. Use UpdateXpress System Pack
Installer to acquire and apply UpdateXpress System Packs and
individual firmware and device-driver updates. For additional information
and to download the UpdateXpress System Pack Installer, go to the
2 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System x and BladeCenter Tools Center at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp and click UpdateXpress System Pack
Installer.
Be sure to separately install any listed critical updates that have release
dates that are later than the release date of the UpdateXpress System
Pack or UpdateXpress image.
When you click an update, an information page is displayed, including a
list of the problems that the update fixes. Review this list for your
specific problem; however, even if your problem is not listed, installing
the update might solve the problem.
b. Check for and correct an incorrect configuration.
If the server is incorrectly configured, a system function can fail to work
when you enable it; if you make an incorrect change to the server
configuration, a system function that has been enabled can stop working.
1) Make sure that all installed hardware and software are supported.
See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ to
verify that the server supports the installed operating system, optional
devices, and software levels. If any hardware or software component is
not supported, uninstall it to determine whether it is causing the problem.
You must remove nonsupported hardware before you contact IBM or an
approved warranty service provider for support.
2) Make sure that the server, operating system, and software are
installed and configured correctly.
Many configuration problems are caused by loose power or signal
cables or incorrectly seated adapters. You might be able to solve the
problem by turning off the server, reconnecting cables, reseating
adapters, and turning the server back on. For information about
performing the checkout procedure, see Checkout procedure on page
61.
If the problem is associated with a specific function (for example, if a
RAID hard disk drive is marked offline in the RAID array), see the
documentation for the associated adapter and management or
controlling software to verify that the adapter is correctly configured.
Problem determination information is available for many devices such as
RAID and network adapters.
For problems with operating systems or IBM software or devices,
complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b) Under Product support, click System x.
c) From the Product family list, select System x3400 M3.
d) Under Support & downloads, click Documentation, Install, and
Use to search for related documentation.
c. Check for troubleshooting procedures and RETAIN tips.
Troubleshooting procedures and RETAIN tips document known problems
and suggested solutions. To search for troubleshooting procedures and
RETAIN tips, complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
Chapter 1. Start here 3
1) Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2) Under Product support, click System x.
3) From the Product family list, select System x3400 M3.
4) Under Support & downloads, click Troubleshoot.
5) Select the troubleshooting procedure or RETAIN tip that applies to your
problem:
v Troubleshooting procedures are under Diagnostic.
v RETAIN tips are under Troubleshoot.
d. Check for and replace defective hardware.
If a hardware component is not operating within specifications, it can cause
unpredictable results. Most hardware failures are reported as error codes in
a system or operating-system log. For more information, see
Troubleshooting tables on page 63 and Chapter 5, Removing and
replacing server components, on page 135. Hardware errors are also
indicated by light path diagnostics LEDs.
A single problem might cause multiple symptoms. Follow the troubleshooting
procedure for the most obvious symptom. If that procedure does not
diagnose the problem, use the procedure for another symptom, if possible.
If the problem remains, contact IBM or an approved warranty service
provider for assistance with additional problem determination and possible
hardware replacement. To open an online service request, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be prepared to provide information
about any error codes and collected data.
Undocumented problems
If you have completed the diagnostic procedure and the problem remains, the
problem might not have been previously identified by IBM. After you have verified
that all code is at the latest level, all hardware and software configurations are valid,
and no light path diagnostics LEDs or log entries indicate a hardware component
failure, contact IBM or an approved warranty service provider for assistance. To
open an online service request, go to http://www.ibm.com/support/electronic/. Be
prepared to provide information about any error codes and collected data and the
problem determination procedures that you have used.
4 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 2. Introduction
This Problem Determination and Service Guide contains information to help you
solve problems that might occur in your IBM

System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379


server. It describes the diagnostic tools that come with the server, error codes and
suggested actions, and instructions for replacing failing components.
Replaceable components are of four types:
v Consumable parts: Purchase and replacement of consumable parts
(components, such as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depletable life)
is your responsibility. If IBM acquires or installs a consumable part at your
request, you will be charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty Information document.
Related documentation
In addition to this document, the following documentation also comes with the
server:
v Installation and User's Guide
This document is in Portable Document Format (PDF) on the IBM Documentation
CD. It provides general information about setting up and cabling the server,
including information about features, and how to configure the server. It also
contains detailed instructions for installing, removing, and connecting optional
devices that the server supports.
v Rack Installation Instructions
This printed document contains instructions for installing the server in a rack.
v Safety Information
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It contains translated
caution and danger statements. Each caution and danger statement that appears
in the documentation has a number that you can use to locate the corresponding
statement in your language in the Safety Information document.
v Warranty Information
This is a document that comes with the server. It contains information about the
terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance.
v Environmental Notices and User's Guide
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It contains translated
environmental notices.
v IBM License Agreement for Machine Code
This document is in PDF on the IBM Documentation CD. It provides translated
versions of the IBM License Agreement for Machine Code for your product.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 5
The System x and xSeries Tools Center is an online information center that
contains information about tools for updating, managing, and deploying firmware,
device drivers, and operating systems. The System x and xSeries Tools Center is at
http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp
Depending on the server model, additional documentation might be included on the
IBM Documentation CD.
The server might have features that are not described in the documentation that
comes with the server. The documentation might be updated occasionally to include
information about those features, or technical updates might be available to provide
additional information that is not included in the server documentation. These
updates are available from the IBM Web site. To check for updated documentation
and technical updates, complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Publications lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3400 and click Continue.
Notices and statements in this document
The caution and danger statements in this document are also in the multilingual
Safety Information document, which is on the IBM System x Documentation CD.
Each statement is numbered for reference to the corresponding statement in the
Safety Information document.
The following notices and statements are used in this document:
v Note: These notices provide important tips, guidance, or advice.
v Important: These notices provide information or advice that might help you avoid
inconvenient or problem situations.
v Attention: These notices indicate potential damage to programs, devices, or
data. An attention notice is placed just before the instruction or situation in which
damage might` occur.
v Caution: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially hazardous
to you. A caution statement is placed just before the description of a potentially
hazardous procedure step or situation.
v Danger: These statements indicate situations that can be potentially lethal or
extremely hazardous to you. A danger statement is placed just before the
description of a potentially lethal or extremely hazardous procedure step or
situation.
6 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Features and specifications
The following information is a summary of the features and specifications of the
server. Depending on the server model, some features might not be available, or
some specifications might not apply.
Table 1. Features and specifications
Microprocessor:
v Intel Xeon up to six-core with
integrated memory controller and
Quick Path Interconnect (QPI)
architecture
v Designed for LGA 1366 socket
v Scalable up to twelve cores
v 32 KB instruction cache, 32 KB
data cache, and 4MB, 8 MB and
12MB cache that is shared among
the cores
v Support for up to two
microprocessors, second
microprocessor with pluggable
VRM
v Support for Intel Extended Memory
64 Technology (EM64T)
Note:
v Use the Setup utility to determine
the type and speed of the
microprocessors. For a list of
supported microprocessors, see
http://www.ibm.com/servers/
eserver/serverproven/compat/us/
v Do not install an Intel Xeon

5500
series microprocessor and an
Xeon

5600 series microprocessor


in the same server.
.
Video controller:
v Matrox G200eV video on system
board
v Compatible with SVGA and VGA
Power supply:
v Standard: One 670 watt (100 - 240
V AC)
Note: On models with eight 3.5-inch
or sixteen 2.5-inch hard disk drives,
need to upgrade power supply to
920-watt.
Hot-swap fans:
v Three (maximum)
Memory:
v Sixteen DIMM connectors (eight
per microprocessor)
v Minimum: 1 GB
Note: If you install a
ServeRAID-M1015 SAS/SATA
adapter, make sure at least 2 GB
of memory is installed in the
server before you run DSA from a
bootable CD.
v Maximum: 128 GB
48 GB using unbuffered
DIMMs (UDIMMs)
128 GB using registered
DIMMs (RDIMMs)
v Type: Registered or unbuffered
ECC double-data-rate 3 (DDR3)
800, 1066, and 1333 MHz DIMMs
only
v RDIMMs sizes: 1 GB, 2 GB , 4
GB , and 8 GB single-rank or
dual-rank
v UDIMMs sizes: 1 GB, 2 GB, and
4 GB single-rank or dual-rank
v Chipkill supported
Drives:
v SATA:
DVD (standard)
DVD/CD-RW (optional)
Maximum of two devices can
be installed
v Diskette (optional): External USB
1.44 MB
v Supported hard disk drives:
Serial Attached SCSI (SAS)
Expansion bays:
v Sixteen 2.5-inch HDD bays (three
optical DVD drive bays)
v Four 3.5-inch simple-swap SATA
drives
v Eight 3.5-inch HDD bays (one
UltraSlim DVD drive)
v Three half-high 5.25-inch bays (one
DVD drive installed)
Note:
SAS expander card does not
support 3 GB RAID adapters.
If the server is configured for
RAID operation using a
ServeRAID adapter, you might
have to reconfigure your disk
arrays after you install drives.
See the ServeRAID adapter
documentation for additional
information about RAID operation
and complete instructions for
using the ServeRAID adapter.
Full-high devices such as an
optional tape drive will occupy
two half-high
5.25-inch bays.
PCI and PCI-X expansion slots:
v Six PCI expansion slots on the
system board:
Four PCI Express x8 (2x8 link,
2x4 link)
One PCI Express x16 (x8 link)
One PCI 32-bit
v One or two expansion slots on the
PCI extender card:
Optional - One PCI Express x8
(x4 link) on the PCI-Express
extender card
Optional - Two PCI-X 64/133
slots on the PCI-X extender card
Chapter 2. Introduction 7
Table 1. Features and specifications (continued)
Size:
v Tower
Height: 440 mm (17.3 in.)
Depth: 767 mm (30.2 in.)
Width: 218 mm (8.6 in.)
Weight: approximately 37.85 kg
(83.4 lb) when fully configured
or 27.1 kg (59.7 lb) minimum
v Rack
5 U
Height: 218 mm (8.6 in.)
Depth: 702 mm (27.6 in.)
Width: 424 mm (16.7 in.)
Weight: approximately 36 kg
(79.3 lb) when fully configured
or 25.8 kg (56.9 lb) minimum
Racks are marked in vertical
increments of 4.45 cm (1.75 inches).
Each increment is referred to as a
unit, or U. A 1-U-high device is 4.45
cm (1.75 inches) tall.
Integrated functions:
v Integrated Management Module
(IMM), which provides service
processor control and monitoring
functions, video controller, and
(when the optional virtual media
key is installed) remote keyboard,
video, mouse, and remote hard
disk drive capabilities
v Dedicated or shared management
network connections
v Six-port Serial ATA (SATA)
controller embedded
v Serial over LAN (SOL) and serial
redirection over Telnet or Secure
Shell (SSH)
v USB flash device with embedded
hypervisor software.
v Support for remote management
presence
v One systems-management RJ-45
for connection to a dedicated
systems-management network.
This system management
connector is dedicated to the IMM
functions.
v Six Universal Serial Bus (USB)
ports standard (v2.0 supporting
v1.1)
Four on rear of server
Two on front of server
v One internal USB tape connector
v One Broadcom dual-port
10/100/1000 Ethernet controller
with Wake on LAN support
v One serial connector, shared with
the IMM
Note: In messages and
documentation, the term service
processor refers to the integrated
management module (IMM).
ServeRAID SAS adapter:
v ServeRAID-BR10i SAS/SATA
adapter that supports RAID levels 0,
1 and 1E (standard)
v ServeRAID-BR10il SAS/SATA
adapter that supports RAID levels 0,
1 and 1E (standard)
v Upgradeable to ServeRAID-MR10i
SAS/SATA adapter, which supports
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10
v Optional ServeRAID-MR10is
SAS/SATA adapter, which supports
RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6, 10
v Optional ServeRAID-M1015
SAS/SATA adapter, which supports
RAID levels 0, 1 and 1E
v Optional ServeRAID-M5014
SAS/SATA adapter, which supports
RAID level 0, 1, 5, 10, 50
v Optional ServeRAID-M5015
SAS/SATA adapter, which supports
RAID level 0, 1, 5, 10, 50
Note: If the server is configured for
RAID operation using a ServeRAID
adapter, you might have to
reconfigure your disk arrays after
you install drives. See the
ServeRAID adapter documentation
for additional information about
RAID operation and complete
instructions for using the ServeRAID
adapter.
Acoustical noise emissions:
v Sound power, idle: 5.5 bel declared
v Sound power, operating: 6.0 bel
declared
8 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 1. Features and specifications (continued)
Environment:
v Air temperature:
Server on: 10C to 35C (50.0F
to 95.0F); altitude: 0 to 915 m
(3000 ft)
Server on: 10C to 32C (50.0F
to 90.0F); altitude: 915 m
(3000 ft) to 2134 m (7000 ft)
Server on: 10C to 28C (50.0F
to 83.0F); altitude: 2134 m
(7000 ft) to 3050 m (10000 ft)
Server off: 5C to 45C (41F to
113F)
Shipping: -40C to 60C
(-40.0F to 140F)
Electrical input:
v Sine-wave input (50-60 Hz)
required
v Input voltage low range:
Minimum: 100 V AC
Maximum: 127 V AC
v Input voltage high range:
Minimum: 200 V AC
Maximum: 240 V AC
v Approximate input
kilovolt-amperes (kVA):
Minimum: 0.60 kVA
Maximum: 1.10 kVA
Notes:
1. Power consumption and heat
output vary depending on the
number and type of optional
features that are installed and
the power-management optional
features that are in use.
2. These levels were measured in
controlled acoustical
environments according to the
procedures that are specified by
the American National Standards
Institute (ANSI) S12.10 and ISO
7779 and are reported in
accordance with ISO 9296.
Actual sound-pressure levels in a
given location might exceed the
average stated values because
of room reflections and other
nearby noise sources. The
declared sound-power levels
indicate an upper limit, below
which a large number of
computers will operate.
Heat output:
Approximate heat output:
v Minimum configuration: 2013 Btu
per hour (590 watts)
v Maximum configuration: 3610 Btu
per hour (1058 watts)
Humidity:
v Server on: 20% to 80%, maximum
dew point 21C, maximum rate of
change 5C/hour
v Server off: 8% to 80%, maximum
dew point 27C
Server controls, LEDs, and connectors
This section describes the controls, light-emitting diodes (LEDs), and connectors on
the front and rear of the server.
Power control button and power-on LED
Press this button to turn the server on and off manually or to wake the
server from a reduced-power state. The states of the power-on LED are as
follows:
Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself has
failed.
Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off and is
not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is disabled. This will
last approximately 20 to 40 seconds.
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to ac
power, the power-control button becomes active.
Chapter 2. Introduction 9
Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to turn on
the server.
Lit: The server is turned on.
Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To wake the
server, press the power-control button or use the IMM Web interface.
See Logging on to the Web interface on page 298 for information on
logging on to the IMM Web interface.
Hard disk drive activity LED
When this LED is flashing, it indicates that a hard disk drive is in use.
System-error LED
When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred.
An LED on the system board might also be lit to help isolate the error. See
Chapter 3, Diagnostics, on page 23 for additional information.
USB connectors
Connect USB devices to these connectors.
DVD-eject button
Press this button to release a CD or DVD from the DVD drive.
DVD drive activity LED
When this LED is lit, it indicates that the DVD drive is in use.
Hot-swap hard disk drive activity LED (some models)
On some server models, each hot-swap drive has a hard disk drive activity
LED. When this green LED is flashing, it indicates that the drive is in use.
When the drive is removed, this LED also is visible on the SAS/SATA
backplane, next to the drive connector. The backplane is the printed circuit
board behind drive bays 4 through 7 on 3.5-inch hard disk drive models and
bays 4 through 11 on 2.5-inch hard disk drive models.
Hot-swap hard disk drive status LED (some models)
On some server models, each hot-swap hard disk drive has an amber
status LED. If this amber status LED for a drive is lit, it indicates that the
associated hard disk drive has failed.
If an optional ServeRAID adapter is installed in the server and the LED
flashes slowly (one flash per second), the drive is being rebuilt. If the LED
flashes rapidly (three flashes per second), the adapter is identifying the
drive.
When the drive is removed, this LED also is visible on the SAS/SATA
backplane, below the hot-swap hard disk drive activity LED.
Please see Event logs on page 23 for more information.
10 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Rear view
The following illustration shows the connectors and LEDs on the rear of the server.
Video
Power cord
connector
Serial 1
(COM 1)
USB 4
USB 3
USB 2
USB 1
System
management
Ethernet
connector
Ethernet 1
10/100/1000
Ethernet 2
10/100/1000
NMI button
Ethernet
transmit/receive
activity LED
Ethernet link
status LED
Ethernet
transmit/receive
activity LED
Ethernet link
status LED
AC power LED
DC power LED
Fault (error) LED
Power-cord connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
AC power LED
This green LED provides status information about the power supply. During
typical operation, both the AC and DC power LEDs are lit.
DC power LED
This green LED provides status information about the power supply. During
typical operation, both the AC and DC power LEDs are lit.
Power-error (Fault) LED
When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that the power supply has failed.
Video connector
Connect a monitor to this connector.
Note: The maximum video resolution is 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz.
Serial connector
Connect a 9-pin serial device to this connector.
Systems-mamagement Ethernet connector
Use this connector to manage the server, using a dedicated management
network. If you use this connector, the IMM cannot be accessed directly
from a production network. A dedicated management network provides
additional security by physically separating the management network traffic
Chapter 2. Introduction 11
from the production network. You can use the Setup utility to configure the
server to use a dedicated systems management network or a shared
network.
USB connectors
Connect USB devices to these connectors.
Ethernet connectors
Use either of these connectors to connect the server to a network. When
you use the Ethernet 1 connector, the network can be shared with the IMM
through a single network cable.
Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED
This LED is on the Ethernet connector. When this LED is lit, it indicates that
there is activity between the server and the network.
Ethernet link status LED
This LED is on the Ethernet connector. When this LED is lit, it indicates that
there is an active connection on the Ethernet port.
Power-supply LEDs
The following illustration shows the locations of the 670-watt power supply LEDs.
Power cord
connector
AC power LED
DC power LED
Fault (error) LED
The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs. For more information about solving
power-supply problems, see Power-supply LEDs on page 84.
12 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 2. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
Description Action Notes AC DC Error
Off Off Off No AC power to
the server or a
problem with the
AC power source
1. Check the AC power to the server.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
3. Turn the server off and then turn the
server back on.
4. If the problem remains, replace the
power supply.
This is a normal
condition when no
AC power is
present.
Off Off On No AC power to
the server or a
problem with the
AC power source
and the power
supply had
detected an
internal problem
1. Replace the power supply.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
This happens only
when a second
power supply is
providing power to
the server.
Off On Off Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
Off On On Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
On Off Off Power supply not
fully seated,
faulty system
board, or faulty
power supply
1. If the system board error (fault) LED is
not lit, replace the power supply.
2. If the system board error (fault) LED is
lit, (Trained service technician only)
replace the system board.
Typically indicates
that a power supply
is not fully seated.
On Off or
Flashing
On Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
On On Off Normal operation
On On On Power supply is
faulty but still
operational
Replace the power supply.
Note: On models with eight 3.5-inch or sixteen 2.5-inch hard disk drives, need to
upgrade power supply to 920-watt.
The following illustration shows the 920-watt power-supply LEDs on the rear of the
server.
Chapter 2. Introduction 13
Table 3. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
Description AC power DC power Power error
Off Off Off No AC power to the server or a problem
with the AC power source
Off Off On No AC power to the server or a problem
with the AC power source and the power
supply has detected an internal problem
Off On Off Faulty power supply
Off On On Faulty power supply
On Off Off Power supply not fully seated, faulty
system board, or faulty power supply
On Off or flashing On Faulty power supply
On On Off Normal operation
On On On Power supply is faulty but still operational
14 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers
The illustrations in this section show the LEDs, connectors, and jumpers on the
internal boards. The illustrations might differ slightly from your hardware.
System board internal connectors
The following illustration shows the internal connectors on the system board.
Chapter 2. Introduction 15
The following illustration shows one additional PCI Express expansion slot that is
available on the PCI Express extender card, if equipped.
The following illustration shows two additional PCI-X expansion slots that are
available on the PCI-X extender card, if equipped.
16 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System board switches and jumpers
The following tables show the settings of the switches and the jumpers.
See Table 4 and Table 5 for information about the switch and jumper settings.
Table 4. System board jumpers
Jumper
number
Jumper
name Jumper setting
JP1 CMOS clear
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Clears CMOS memory.
JP6 UEFI boot
recovery
v Pins 1 and 2: Normal operation (default).
v Pins 2 and 3: Enable the UEFI recovery mode.
JP7 Trust
Platform
Module
(TPM)
v Pins 1 and 2: TPM physical presence is asserted.
v Pins 2 and 3: TPM physical presence is not asserted (default).
Note: The physical presence requires manual setting on the
server to change the TPM configuration. The TPM is enabled
and physical presence is not asserted by default. The physical
presence needs to be asserted to activate, deactivate, clear or
change ownership of the TPM.
Note: If no jumper is present, the server responds as on default position.
Table 5. System board switch 6
SW 6 Switches Switch description
1 Reserved (default off)
2 Power-on password override when on. (default off)
3 Reserved (default off)
4 When this switch is off, the primary IMM firmware ROM page is loaded. When this switch is on,
the secondary (backup) IMM firmware ROM page is loaded. (default off)
Chapter 2. Introduction 17
Notes:
1. Before you change any switch settings or move any jumpers, turn off the server;
then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. (Review the information in
Safety on page vii, Installation guidelines on page 135, and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.)
18 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System board LEDs
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one or
two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI
Express extender card, if equipped.
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI-X extender card, if equipped.
Chapter 2. Introduction 19
System board external connectors
The following illustration shows the external input/output connectors on the system
board.
GbE RJ-45
LAN connectors
10/100m RJ-45
connector
system
management
Video port
Serial port
NMI button
USB ports
Hard disk drive backplane connectors
The following illustrations show the connectors on the 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch hard
disk drive backplanes.
20 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Figure 1. Connectors on the 3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane
Figure 2. Connectors on the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane
Chapter 2. Introduction 21
22 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 3. Diagnostics
This chapter describes the diagnostic tools that are available to help you solve
problems that might occur in the server.
If you cannot diagnose and correct a problem by using the information in this
chapter, see Appendix A, Getting help and technical assistance, on page 309 for
more information.
Diagnostic tools
The following tools are available to help you diagnose and solve hardware-related
problems:
v POST error messages
The power-on self-test (POST) generates messages to indicate successful test
completion or the detection of a problem. See POST error codes on page 26
for more information.
v Event logs
For information about the POST event log, the system-event log, the integrated
management module (IMM) event log, and the DSA log, see Event logs and
System-event log on page 35.
v Troubleshooting tables
These tables list problem symptoms and actions to correct the problems. See
Troubleshooting tables on page 63.
v Light path diagnostics
Use the light path diagnostics to diagnose system errors quickly. See Light path
diagnostics on page 78 for more information.
v Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major
components of the server. See Diagnostic programs, messages, and error
codes on page 85 for more information.
Event logs
Error codes and messages are displayed in the following types of event logs:
v POST event log: This log contains the three most recent error codes and
messages that were generated during POST. You can view the POST event log
through the Setup utility.
v System-event log: This log contains all IMM, POST, and system management
interrupt (SMI) events. You can view the system-event log through the Setup
utility and through the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the IPMI
event log).
The system-event log is limited in size. When it is full, new entries will not
overwrite existing entries; therefore, you must periodically save and then clear
the system-event log through the Setup utility when the IMM logs an event that
indicates that the log is more than 75% full. When you are troubleshooting, you
might have to save and then clear the system-event log to make the most recent
events available for analysis.
Messages are listed on the left side of the screen, and details about the selected
message are displayed on the right side of the screen. To move from one entry
to the next, use the Up Arrow () and Down Arrow () keys.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 23
Some IMM sensors cause assertion events to be logged when their setpoints are
reached. When a setpoint condition no longer exists, a corresponding
deassertion event is logged. However, not all events are assertion-type events.
v Integrated management module (IMM) event log: This log contains a filtered
subset of all IMM, POST, and system management interrupt (SMI) events. You
can view the IMM event log through the IMM Web interface and through the
Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program (as the ASM event log).
v DSA log: This log is generated by the Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) program,
and it is a chronologically ordered merge of the system-event log (as the IPMI
event log), the IMM event log (as the ASM event log), and the operating-system
event logs. You can view the DSA log through the DSA program.
Viewing event logs through the Setup utility
To view the POST event log or system-event log, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to view the event logs.
3. Select System Event Logs and use one of the following procedures:
v To view the POST event log, select POST Event Viewer.
v To view the system-event log, select System Event Log.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
Viewing event logs without restarting the server
If the server is not hung, methods are available for you to view one or more event
logs without having to restart the server.
If you have installed Portable or Installable Dynamic System Analysis (DSA), you
can use it to view the system-event log (as the IPMI event log), the IMM event log
(as the ASM event log), or the merged DSA log. You can also use DSA Preboot to
view these logs, although you must restart the server to use DSA Preboot. To install
Portable DSA, Installable DSA, or DSA Preboot or to download a DSA Preboot CD
image, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?lndocid=SERV-DSA&brandind=5000008 or complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Under Related downloads, click Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) to display
the matrix of downloadable DSA files.
If IPMItool is installed in the server, you can use it to view the system-event log.
Most recent versions of the Linux operating system come with a current version of
IPMItool. For information about IPMItool, see http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/
infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp?topic=/com.ibm.xseries.tools.doc/
config_tools_ipmitool.html or complete the following steps.
24 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/v1r0/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
3. Expand Tools reference, expand Configuration tools, expand IPMI tools, and
click IPMItool.
For an overview of IPMI, go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/
index.jsp?topic=/liaai/ipmi/liaaiipmi.htm or complete the following steps:
1. Go to http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/systems/index.jsp.
2. In the navigation pane, click IBM Systems Information Center.
3. Expand Operating systems, expand Linux information, expand Blueprints
for Linux on IBM systems, and click Using Intelligent Platform Management
Interface (IPMI) on IBM Linux platforms.
You can view the IMM event log through the Event Log link in the integrated
management module (IMM) Web interface.
The following table describes the methods that you can use to view the event logs,
depending on the condition of the server. The first two conditions generally do not
require that you restart the server.
Table 6. Methods for viewing event logs
Condition Action
The server is not hung and is connected to a
network.
Use any of the following methods:
v Run Portable or Installable DSA to view
the event logs or create an output file that
you can send to IBM service and support.
v Type the IP address of the IMM and go to
the Event Log page.
v Use IPMItool to view the system-event log.
The server is not hung and is not connected
to a network.
Use IPMItool locally to view the system-event
log.
The server is hung.
v If DSA Preboot is installed, restart the
server and press F2 to start DSA Preboot
and view the event logs.
v If DSA Preboot is not installed, insert the
DSA Preboot CD and restart the server to
start DSA Preboot and view the event
logs.
v Alternatively, you can restart the server
and press F1 to start the Setup utility and
view the POST event log or system-event
log. For more information, see Viewing
event logs through the Setup utility on
page 24.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 25
POST error codes
When you turn on the server, it performs a series of tests to check the operation of
the server components and some optional devices in the server. This series of tests
is called the power-on self-test, or POST.
If a power-on password is set, you must type the password and press Enter, when
you are prompted, for POST to run.
If POST is completed without detecting any problems, the server startup is
completed.
If POST detects a problem, an error message is sent to the POST event log.
The following table describes the POST error codes and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. These errors can appear as severe, warning, or
informational.
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
0010002 Microprocessor not supported
1. Reseat the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2 (if one is installed)
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 2 and restart the server.
3. (Trained service technician only) Remove
microprocessor 1 and install microprocessor 2 in
the microprocessor 1 connector. Restart the
server. If the error is corrected, microprocessor 1
is bad and must be replaced.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 1
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor 2
c. (Trained service technician only) System
board
0011000 Invalid microprocessor type
1. Update the firmware (see Updating the firmware
on page 286).
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace the affected microprocessor (error LED is
lit) with a supported type.
26 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
0011002 Microprocessor mismatch
1. Run the Setup utility and view the microprocessor
information to compare the installed
microprocessor specifications.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.
0011004 Microprocessor failed BIST
1. Update the firmware (see Updating the firmware
on page 286).
2. (Trained service technician only) Reseat
microprocessor 2.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
001100A Microcode update failed
1. Update the server firmware (see Updating the
firmware on page 286).
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
microprocessor.
0050001 DIMM disabled
1. Make sure the DIMM is installed correctly (see
Installing a memory module on page 216).
2. If the DIMM was disabled because of a memory
fault, follow the suggested actions for that error
event.
3. If no memory fault is recorded in the logs and no
DIMM connector error LED is lit, you can
re-enable the DIMM through the Setup utility or
the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
0051003 Uncorrectable DIMM error
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level
(seeUpdating the firmware on page 286).
2. (Trained service technician only) If the same
DIMM connector experiences a subsequent
uncorrectable error, reverse the positions of
microprocessor 1 and microprocessor 2.
3. (Trained service technician only) If the problem is
related to the microprocessor, replace the failing
microprocessor.
4. (Trained service technician only) If the problem is
not related to the microprocessor, replace the
system board.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 27
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
0051006 DIMM mismatch detected Make sure that the DIMMs match and are installed in
the correct sequence (see Installing a memory
module on page 216).
0051009 No memory detected
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
Installing a memory module on page 216).
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
failing microprocessor.
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
0600369 No memory detected
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
Installing a memory module on page 216).
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
failing microprocessor.
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
005100A No usable memory detected
1. Make sure that the server contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
Installing a memory module on page 216).
4. Clear CMOS memory to re-enable all the memory
connectors (see System board switches and
jumpers on page 17).
0058001 PFA threshold exceeded
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level
(seeUpdating the firmware on page 286).
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run the memory test (see
Running the diagnostic programs on page 85.)
3. Replace the failing DIMM, which is indicated by a
lit LED on the system board.
28 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
0058007 DIMM population is unsupported
1. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those
that are identified and replace it with an identical
pair of known good DIMMs, then restart the
server.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to
their original connectors, restarting the server
after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace the
DIMMs in the failed pair with identical known
good DIMMs, restarting the server after each
DIMM is installed. Replace the failed DIMM.
Repeat this step until you have tested all
removed DIMMs.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
0058008 DIMM failed memory test
1. Update the server firmware to the latest level
(seeUpdating the firmware on page 286).
2. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
3. Reverse the DIMMs between the channels (of the
same microprocessor), and then restart the
server. If the problem is related to a DIMM,
replace the failing DIMM.
4. (Trained service technician only) Install the failed
DIMM into a DIMM connector for microprocessor
2 (if installed) to verify that the problem is not the
microprocessor or the DIMM connector.
5. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
0058015 Start to Activate Spare Memory Channel Information only. A failed DIMM has been detected to
activate the memory online-spare feature. Check the
event log for uncorrected DIMM failure events.
Note: The memory online-spare feature is supported
on server models with an Intel Xeon

5600 series
microprocessor.
00580A1 Invalid DIMM population for mirroring mode
1. If a fault LED is lit, resolve the failure.
2. Install the DIMMs in the correct sequence (see
Installing a memory module on page 216).
00580A4 Memory population changed Information only. Memory has been added, moved, or
changed.
00580A5 Mirror failover complete Information only. Memory redundancy has been lost.
Check the event log for uncorrected DIMM failure
events.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 29
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
00580A6 Spare Memory Channel Activated Information only. Memory online-spare channel has
been activated to back up a failed DIMM. Check the
event log for uncorrected DIMM failure events.
Note: The memory online-spare feature is supported
on server models with an Intel Xeon

5600 series
microprocessor.
0068002 CMOS battery cleared
1. Reseat the battery.
2. Clear the CMOS memory (see System board
switches and jumpers on page 17).
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the following order, restarting the server after
each one:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2011000 PCI-X PERR
1. Check the extender card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2011001 PCI-X SERR
1. Check the extender-card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove the adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
30 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
2018001 PCI Express uncorrected or uncorrected
error
1. Check the extender-card LEDs.
2. Reseat all affected adapters and extender cards.
3. Update the PCI device firmware.
4. Remove both adapters from the extender card.
5. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Extender card
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
2018002 Option ROM resource allocation failure Informational message that some devices might not
be initialized.
1. If possible, rearrange the order of the adapters in
the PCI slots to change the load order of the
optional-device ROM code.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Start Options, and
change the boot priority to change the load order
of the optional-device ROM code.
3. Run the Setup utility and disable some other
resources, if their functions are not being used, to
make more space available. Select Devices and
I/O Ports to disable any of the integrated devices.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Each adapter
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3xx0007 (xx
can be 00 - 19)
Firmware fault detected, system halted
1. Recover the server firmware to the latest level.
2. Undo any recent configuration changes, or clear
CMOS memory to restore the settings to the
default values.
3. Remove any recently installed hardware.
3038003 Firmware corrupted
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings to recover the
server firmware.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3048005 Booted secondary (backup) server firmware
image
Information only. The backup switch was used to boot
the secondary bank.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 31
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
3048006 Booted secondary (backup) server firmware
image because of ABR
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings to recover the
primary server firmware settings.
2. Turn off the server and remove it from the power
source.
3. Reconnect the server to the power source, and
then turn on the server.
305000A RTC date/time is incorrect
1. Adjust the date and time settings in the Setup
utility, and then restart the server.
2. Reseat the battery.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. (Trained service technician only) System
board
3058001 System configuration invalid
1. Run the Setup utility, and select Save Settings.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Reseat the following components one at a time in
the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must
be reseated by a trained service technician
only)
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each
time:
a. Battery
b. Failing device (if the device is a FRU, it must
be replaced by a trained service technician
only)
c. (Trained service technician only) System
board
32 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
3058004 Three boot failures
1. Undo any recent system changes, such as new
settings or newly installed devices.
2. Make sure that the server is attached to a reliable
power source.
3. Remove all hardware that is not listed on the
ServerProven Web site.
4. Make sure that the operating system is not
corrupted.
5. Run the Setup utility, save the configuration, and
then restart the server.
3108007 System configuration restored to default
settings
Information only. This is message is usually
associated with the CMOS battery clear event.
3138002 Boot configuration error
1. Remove any recent configuration changes that
you made in the Setup utility.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3808000 IMM communication failure
1. Remove power from the server for 30 seconds,
and then reconnect the server to power and
restart it.
2. Update the IMM firmware. (See Updating the
firmware on page 286).
3. Make sure that the virtual media key is seated
and not damaged.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3808002 Error updating system configuration to IMM
1. Remove power from the server, and then
reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the firmware.
3808003 Error retrieving system configuration from
IMM
1. Remove power from the server, and then
reconnect the server to power and restart it.
2. Run the Setup utility and select Save Settings.
3. Update the IMM firmware.
3808004 IMM system-event log full
v When out-of-band, use the IMM Web interface or
IPMItool to clear the logs from the operating
system.
v When using the local console:
1. Run the Setup utility.
2. Select System Event Logs.
3. Select Clear System Event Log.
4. Restart the server.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 33
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Error code Description Action
3818001 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
update failed
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818002 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
update aborted
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818003 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
flash lock failed
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818004 Core Root of Trust Measurement (CRTM)
system error
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818005 Current Bank Core Root of Trust
Measurement (CRTM) capsule signature
invalid
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818006 Opposite bank CRTM capsule signature
invalid
1. Switch the firmware bank to the backup bank.
2. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
3. Switch the bank back to the current bank.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3818007 CRTM update capsule signature invalid
1. Run the Setup utility, select Load Default
Settings, and save the settings.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
3828004 AEM power capping disabled
1. Check the settings and the event logs.
2. Make sure that the Active Energy Manager
feature is enabled in the Setup utility. Select
System Settings>Power>Active Energy
Manager>Capping Enabled.
3. Update the server firmware.
4. Update the IMM firmware.
34 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
System-event log
The system-event log contains messages of three types:
Information
Information messages do not require action; they record significant
system-level events, such as when the server is started.
Warning
Warning messages do not require immediate action; they indicate possible
problems, such as when the recommended maximum ambient temperature
is exceeded.
Error Error messages might require action; they indicate system errors, such as
when a fan is not detected.
Each message contains date and time information, and it indicates the source of
the message (POST or the IMM).
Integrated management module error messages
The following table describes the IMM error messages and suggested actions to
correct the detected problems. For more information about IMM, see the Integrated
Management Module User's Guide at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5079770&brandind=5000008.
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Message Severity Description Action
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going
high (upper critical) has asserted.
Error An upper critical sensor
going high has asserted.
Reduce the ambient temperature.
Numeric sensor Ambient Temp going
high (upper non-recoverable) has
asserted.
Error An upper nonrecoverable
sensor going high has
asserted.
Reduce the ambient temperature.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going
low (lower critical) has asserted.
Error A lower critical sensor going
low has asserted.
(Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 3.3V going
high (upper critical) has asserted.
Error An upper critical sensor
going high has asserted.
(Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going low
(lower critical) has asserted.
Error A lower critical sensor going
low has asserted.
(Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar 5V going high
(upper critical) has asserted.
Error An upper critical sensor
going high has asserted.
(Trained service technician only)
Replace the system board.
Numeric sensor Planar VBAT going
low (lower critical) has asserted.
Error A lower critical sensor going
low has asserted.
Replace the 3 V battery.
Numeric sensor Fan n Tach going
low (lower critical) has asserted.
(n = fan number)
Error A lower critical sensor going
low has asserted.
1. Reseat the failing fan n, which
is indicated by a lit LED on
the fan.
2. Replace the failing fan.
(n = fan number)
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 35
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Processor CPU nStatus has
Failed with IERR.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error A processor failed - IERR
condition has occurred.
1. Make sure that the latest
levels of firmware and device
drivers are installed for all
adapters and standard
devices, such as Ethernet,
SCSI, and SAS.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Run the DSA program for the
hard disk drives and other I/O
devices.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
An Over-Temperature Condition has
been detected on the Processor CPU
nStatus.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error An overtemperature
condition has occurred for
microprocessor n.
(n = microprocessor number)
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
36 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The Processor CPU nStatus has
Failed with FRB1/BIST condition.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error A processor failed -
FRB1/BIST condition has
occurred.
1. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink
on page 271 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
The Processor CPU nStatus has a
Configuration Mismatch.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error A processor configuration
mismatch has occurred.
1. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink
on page 271 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
2. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the
incompatible microprocessor.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 37
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
An SM BIOS Uncorrectable CPU
complex error for Processor CPU
nStatus has asserted.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error An SMBIOS uncorrectable
CPU complex error has
asserted.
1. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Make sure that the installed
microprocessors are
compatible with each other
(see Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink
on page 271 for information
about microprocessor
requirements).
3. (Trained service technician
only) Reseat microprocessor
n.
4. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
38 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to non-recoverable from
a less severe state.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state from a
less severe state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor n is
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to critical from a
non-recoverable state.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Critical state from
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Sensor CPU nOverTemp has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = microprocessor number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffle is in place
and correctly installed, and
that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. Make sure that the heat sink
for microprocessor nis
installed correctly.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace microprocessor
n.
(n = microprocessor number)
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 39
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A diagnostic interrupt has occurred
on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error An operator information
panel NMI/diagnostic
interrupt has occurred.
If the NMI button on the system
board has not been pressed,
complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that the NMI
button is not pressed.
2. Replace the operator
information panel cable.
3. Replace the operator
information panel.
A bus timeout has occurred on
system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A bus timeout has occurred.
1. Remove the adapter from the
PCI slot that is indicated by a
lit LED.
2. Replace the extender card.
3. Remove all PCI adapters.
4. (Trained service technicians
only) Replace the system
board.
A software NMI has occurred on
system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A software NMI has
occurred.
1. Check the device driver.
2. Reinstall the device driver.
The System %1 encountered a
POST Error.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A POST error has occurred.
(Sensor = ABR Status)
1. Recover the server firmware
from the backup page (see
Recovering from an IBM
System x Server Firmware
update failure on page 122).
2. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
40 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
The System %1 encountered a
POST Error.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A POST error has occurred.
(Sensor = Firmware Error)
1. Make sure that the server
contains DIMMs.
2. Reseat the DIMMs.
3. Install DIMMs in the correct
sequence (see Installing a
memory module on page
216).
4. Update the server firmware
on the primary page.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the failing
microprocessor.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
An Uncorrectable Bus Error has
occurred on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A bus uncorrectable error
has occurred.
(Sensor = Critical Int PCI)
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check the PCI error LEDs.
3. Remove the adapter from the
indicated PCI slot.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 41
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
An Uncorrectable Bus Error has
occurred on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A bus uncorrectable error
has occurred.
(Sensor = Critical Int CPU)
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check the microprocessor
error LEDs.
3. Remove the failing
microprocessor from the
system board.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. Make sure that the two
microprocessors are
matching.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
An Uncorrectable Bus Error has
occurred on system %1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A bus uncorrectable error
has occurred.
(Sensor = Critical Int DIM)
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check the DIMM error LEDs.
3. Remove the failing DIMM
from the system board.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. Make sure that the installed
DIMMs are supported and
configured correctly.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
42 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Sys Board Fault has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
Error A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Check the system-event log.
2. Check for an error LED on
the system board.
3. Replace any failing device.
4. Check for a server firmware
update.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
The Power Supply (Power Supply: n)
has Failed.
(n = power supply number)
Error Power supply nhas failed.
(n = power supply number)
1. If the power-on LED is lit,
complete the following steps:
a. Reduce the server to the
minimum configuration.
b. Reinstall the components
one at a time, restarting
the server each time.
c. If the error recurs, replace
the component that you
just reinstalled.
2. Reseat power supply n.
3. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PS n Fan Fault has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
(n = power supply number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that there are no
obstructions, such as bundled
cables, to the airflow from the
power-supply fan.
2. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 43
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail A Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the PCI
adapter and microprocessor
1. Reinstall the
microprocessor in socket 1
and restart the server.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail B Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the PCI
adapter and microprocessor
2.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
44 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail C Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the hard disk drives,
hard disk drive backplanes,
and DIMMs in connectors 1
through 8.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail D Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the optical drive and
the DIMMs in connectors 9
through 16.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall the microprocessor
in socket 1 and restart the
server.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the failing
microprocessor.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor Pwr Rail E Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the optical
drive and the PCI adapter.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 45
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Sensor Pwr Rail F Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Turn off the server and
disconnect it from power.
2. Remove the hard disk drives
and the hard disk drive
backplanes.
3. Restart the server.
4. Reinstall each device, one at
a time, starting the server
each time to isolate the failing
device.
5. Replace the failing device.
6. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Sensor PS n Therm Fault has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
(n = power supply number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that there are no
obstructions, such as bundled
cables, to the airflow from the
power-supply fan.
2. Replace power supply n.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V OV Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = power supply number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Remove the power supplies.
2. Replace power supply n.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V UV Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Remove the power supplies.
2. Replace power supply n.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PSn 12V OC Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = power supply number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Remove the power supplies.
2. Replace power supply n.
3. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
(n = power supply number)
Sensor PS n VCO Fault has
transitioned to non-recoverable.
(n = power supply number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Nonrecoverable state.
1. Replace the failing power
supply.
(n = power supply number)
46 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Redundancy Power Unit has been
reduced.
Error Redundancy has been lost
and is insufficient to continue
operation.
1. Check the LEDs for both
power supplies.
2. Follow the actions in
Power-supply LEDs on page
84.
Sensor RAID Error has transitioned
to critical from a less severe state.
Error A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Check the hard disk drive
LEDs.
2. Reseat the hard disk drive for
which the status LED is lit.
3. Replace the defective hard
disk drive.
The Drive n Status has been
removed from unit Drive 0 Status.
(n = hard disk drive number)
Error A drive has been removed. Reseat hard disk drive n.
(n = hard disk drive number)
The Drive n Status has been
disabled due to a detected fault.
(n = hard disk drive number)
Error A drive has been disabled
because of a fault.
1. Run the hard disk drive
diagnostic test on drive n.
2. Reseat the following
components:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
3. Replace the following
components one at a time, in
the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Hard disk drive
b. Cable from the system
board to the backplane
c. Hard disk drive backplane
(n = hard disk drive number)
Array %1 is in critical condition.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error An array is in Critical state.
(Sensor = Drive n Status)
(n = hard disk drive number)
Replace the hard disk drive that
is indicated by a lit status LED.
Array %1 has failed.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error An array is in Failed state.
(Sensor = Drive n Status)
(n = hard disk drive number)
Replace the hard disk drive that
is indicated by a lit status LED.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 47
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory uncorrectable error detected
for DIMM All DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem All DIMMs.
Error A memory uncorrectable
error has occurred.
1. If the server failed the POST
memory test, reseat the
DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for
DIMM All DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem All DIMMs.
Error The memory logging limit
has been reached.
1. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error
for All DIMMs on Memory Subsystem
All DIMMs.
Error A DIMM configuration error
has occurred.
Make sure that DIMMs are
installed in the correct sequence
and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory uncorrectable error detected
for DIMM One of the DIMMs on
Memory Subsystem One of the
DIMMs.
Error A memory uncorrectable
error has occurred.
1. If the server failed the POST
memory test, reseat the
DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
48 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for
DIMM One of the DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.
Error The memory logging limit
has been reached.
1. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error
for One of the DIMMs on Memory
Subsystem One of the DIMMs.
Error A DIMM configuration error
has occurred.
Make sure that DIMMs are
installed in the correct sequence
and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Memory DIMM scrub failure for
DIMM n Status on Memory
Subsystem DIMM n Status.
(n = DIMM number)
Error DIMM scrub failure.
1. Check the IBM support
website for an applicable
retain tip or firmware update
that applies to this memory
error.
2. Manually re-enable all
affected DIMMs if the server
firmware version is older than
UEFI v1.10. If the server
firmware version is UEFI
v1.10 or newer, disconnect
and reconnect the server to
the power source and restart
the server.
3. Swap the affected DIMMs (as
indicated by the error LEDs
on the system board or the
event logs) to a different
memory channel or
microprocessor (see
Installing a memory module
on page 216 for memory
population).
4. If the problem is related to a
DIMM, replace the failing
DIMM (see Removing a
memory module on page 215
and Installing a memory
module on page 216).
(Continued on the next page)
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 49
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory DIMM scrub failure for
DIMM n Status on Memory
Subsystem DIMM n Status.
(n = DIMM number)
Error DIMM scrub failure.
5. (Trained service technician
only) If the problem occurs on
the same DIMM connector,
check the DIMM connector. If
the connector contains any
foreign material or is
damaged, replace the system
board (see Removing the
system board on page 281
and Installing the system
board on page 283).
6. (Trained service technician
only) Remove the affected
microprocessor and check the
microprocessor socket pins
for any damaged pins. If a
damage is found, replace the
system board (see Removing
the system board on page
281 and Installing the system
board on page 283).
7. (Trained service technician
only) If the problem is related
to microprocessor socket
pins, replace the system
board (see Removing the
system board on page 281
and Installing the system
board on page 283).
8. (Trained Service technician
only) Replace the affected
microprocessor (see
Removing a microprocessor
and heat sink on page 269
and Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink
on page 271).
50 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Memory uncorrectable error detected
for DIMM n Status on Memory
Subsystem DIMM n Status.
(n = DIMM number)
Error A memory uncorrectable
error has occurred.
1. If the server failed the POST
memory test, reseat the
DIMMs.
2. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Note: You do not have to
replace DIMMs by pairs.
3. Run the Setup utility to enable
all the DIMMs.
4. Run the DSA memory test.
5. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Memory Logging Limit Reached for
DIMM nStatus on Memory
Subsystem DIMMnStatus.
(n = DIMM number)
Error The memory logging limit
has been reached.
1. Update the server firmware to
the latest level.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
2. Reseat the DIMMs and run
the DSA memory test.
3. Replace any DIMM that is
indicated by a lit error LED.
Memory DIMM Configuration Error
for DIMM nStatus on Memory
Subsystem DIMM nStatus.
(n = DIMM number)
Error A DIMM configuration error
has occurred.
Make sure that DIMMs are
installed in the correct sequence
and have the same size, type,
speed, and technology.
Sensor DIMM n Temp has
transitioned to critical from a less
severe state.
(n = DIMM number)
Error A sensor has changed to
Critical state from a less
severe state.
1. Make sure that the fans are
operating, that there are no
obstructions to the airflow,
that the air baffles are in
place and correctly installed,
and that the server cover is
installed and completely
closed.
2. If a fan has failed, complete
the action for a fan failure.
3. Replace DIMM n.
(n = DIMM number)
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 51
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI PERR has occurred on system
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A PCI PERR has occurred.
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =
PCI slot number)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)
A PCI SERR has occurred on system
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A PCI SERR has occurred.
(Sensor = PCI Slot n; n =
PCI slot number)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove the adapter from slot
n.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace extender card n.
(n = PCI slot number)
52 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
A PCI PERR has occurred on system
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A PCI PERR has occurred.
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and riser card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
A PCI SERR has occurred on system
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error A PCI SERR has occurred.
(Sensor = One of PCI Err)
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 53
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Fault in slot System board on system
%1.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Error
1. Check the extender-card
LEDs.
2. Reseat the affected adapters
and extender card.
3. Update the server and
adapter firmware (UEFI and
IMM).
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
4. Remove both adapters.
5. Replace the PCIe adapter.
6. Replace the extender card.
7. (Trained service technician
only) Replace the system
board.
Redundancy Bckup Mem Status has
been reduced.
Error Redundancy has been lost
and is insufficient to continue
operation.
1. Check the system-event log
for DIMM failure events
(uncorrectable or PFA) and
correct the failures.
2. Re-enable mirroring in the
Setup utility.
IMM Network Initialization Complete. Info An IMM network has
completed initialization.
No action; information only.
Certificate Authority %1 has detected
a %2 Certificate Error.
(%1 = IBM_CertificateAuthority.
CADistinguishedName;
%2 = CIM_PublicKeyCertificate.
ElementName)
Error A problem has occurred with
the SSL Server, SSL Client,
or SSL Trusted CA certificate
that has been imported into
the IMM. The imported
certificate must contain a
public key that corresponds
to the key pair that was
previously generated by the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing
Request link.
1. Make sure that the certificate
that you are importing is
correct.
2. Try importing the certificate
again.
Ethernet Data Rate modified from %1
to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.Speed;
%3 = user ID)
Info A user has modified the
Ethernet port data rate.
No action; information only.
54 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Ethernet Duplex setting modified
from %1 to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.FullDuplex;
%3 = user ID)
Info A user has modified the
Ethernet port duplex setting.
No action; information only.
Ethernet MTU setting modified from
%1 to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
ActiveMaximumTransmissionUnit; %3
= user ID)
Info A user has modified the
Ethernet port MTU setting.
No action; information only.
Ethernet Duplex setting modified
from %1 to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_EthernetPort.
NetworkAddresses;
%2 = CIM_EthernetPort.
NetworkAddresses;
%3 = user ID)
Info A user has modified the
Ethernet port MAC address
setting.
No action; information only.
Ethernet interface %1 by user %2.
(%1 =
CIM_EthernetPort.EnabledState;
%2 = user ID)
Info A user has enabled or
disabled the Ethernet
interface.
No action; information only.
Hostname set to %1 by user %2.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname;
%2 = user ID)
Info A user has modified the host
name of the IMM.
No action; information only.
IP address of network interface
modified from %1 to %2 by user %3.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.IPAddress;
%3 = user ID)
Info A user has modified the IP
address of the IMM.
No action; information only.
IP subnet mask of network interface
modified from %1 to %2 by user
%3s.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.SubnetMask;
%3 = user ID)
Info A user has modified the IP
subnet mask of the IMM.
No action; information only.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 55
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
IP address of default gateway
modified from %1 to %2 by user
%3s.
(%1 = CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
GatewayIPv4Address;
%2 = CIM_StaticIPAssignment
SettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress;
%3 = user ID)
Info A user has modified the
default gateway IP address
of the IMM.
No action; information only.
OS Watchdog response %1 by %2.
(%1 = Enabled or Disabled; %2 =
user ID)
Info A user has enabled or
disabled an OS Watchdog.
No action; information only.
DHCP[%1] failure, no IP address
assigned.
(%1 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Info A DHCP server has failed to
assign an IP address to the
IMM.
1. Make sure that the network
cable is connected.
2. Make sure that there is a
DHCP server on the network
that can assign an IP address
to the IMM.
Remote Login Successful. Login ID:
%1 from %2 at IP address %3.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
ValueMap(CIM_ProtocolEndpoint.
ProtocolIFType; %3 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Info A user has successfully
logged in to the IMM.
No action; information only.
Attempting to %1 server %2 by user
%3.
(%1 = Power Up, Power Down,
Power Cycle, or Reset; %2 =
IBM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %3 = user ID)
Info A user has used the IMM to
perform a power function on
the server.
No action; information only.
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login
failures from WEB client at IP
address %3.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Error A user has exceeded the
maximum number of
unsuccessful login attempts
from a Web browser and has
been prevented from logging
in for the lockout period.
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
Security: Login ID: '%1' had %2 login
failures from CLI at %3.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Error A user has exceeded the
maximum number of
unsuccessful login attempts
from the command-line
interface and has been
prevented from logging in for
the lockout period.
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
56 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid
userid or password received. Userid
is '%1' from WEB browser at IP
address %2.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Error A user has attempted to log
in from a Web browser by
using an invalid login ID or
password.
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
Remote access attempt failed. Invalid
userid or password received. Userid
is '%1' from TELNET client at IP
address %2.
(%1 = user ID; %2 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Error A user has attempted to log
in from a Telnet session by
using an invalid login ID or
password.
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on
system %1 cleared by user %2.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName; %2 = user ID)
Info A user has cleared the IMM
event log.
No action; information only.
IMM reset was initiated by user %1.
(%1 = user ID)
Info A user has initiated a reset
of the IMM.
No action; information only.
ENET[0] DHCP-HSTN=%1, DN=%2,
IP@=%3, SN=%4, GW@=%5,
DNS1@=%6.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname; %2 =
CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
DomainName; %3 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
IPv4Address; %4 =
CIM_IPProtocolEndpoint.
SubnetMask; %5 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx; %6 = IP address,
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Info The DHCP server has
assigned an IMM IP address
and configuration.
No action; information only.
ENET[0] IP-Cfg:HstName=%1,
IP@%2, NetMsk=%3, GW@=%4.
(%1 = CIM_DNSProtocolEndpoint.
Hostname; %2 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
IPv4Address; %3 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
SubnetMask; %4 =
CIM_StaticIPSettingData.
DefaultGatewayAddress)
Info An IMM IP address and
configuration have been
assigned using client data.
No action; information only.
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is no
longer active.
Info The IMM Ethernet interface
has been disabled.
No action; information only.
LAN: Ethernet[0] interface is now
active.
Info The IMM Ethernet interface
has been enabled.
No action; information only.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 57
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
DHCP setting changed to by user
%1.
(%1 = user ID)
Info A user has changed the
DHCP mode.
No action; information only.
IMM: Configuration %1 restored from
a configuration file by user %2.
(%1 = CIM_ConfigurationData.
ConfigurationName; %2 = user ID)
Info A user has restored the IMM
configuration by importing a
configuration file.
No action; information only.
Watchdog %1 Screen Capture
Occurred.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
Watchdog)
Error An operating-system error
has occurred, and the
screen capture was
successful.
1. Reconfigure the watchdog
timer to a higher value.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
Watchdog %1 Failed to Capture
Screen.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
Watchdog)
Error An operating-system error
has occurred, and the
screen capture failed.
1. Reconfigure the watchdog
timer to a higher value.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
6. Update the IMM firmware.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part
of a cluster solution, verify
that the latest level of code is
supported for the cluster
solution before you update
the code.
58 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Running the backup IMM main
application.
Error The IMM has resorted to
running the backup main
application.
Update the IMM firmware.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
Please ensure that the IMM is
flashed with the correct firmware. The
IMM is unable to match its firmware
to the server.
Error The server does not support
the installed IMM firmware
version.
Update the IMM firmware to a
version that the server supports.
Important: Some cluster
solutions require specific code
levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a
cluster solution, verify that the
latest level of code is supported
for the cluster solution before you
update the code.
IMM reset was caused by restoring
default values.
Info The IMM has been reset
because a user has restored
the configuration to its
default settings.
No action; information only.
IMM clock has been set from NTP
server %1.
(%1 =
IBM_NTPService.ElementName)
Info The IMM clock has been set
to the date and time that is
provided by the Network
Time Protocol server.
No action; information only.
SSL data in the IMM configuration
data is invalid. Clearing configuration
data region and disabling SSL+H25.
Error There is a problem with the
certificate that has been
imported into the IMM. The
imported certificate must
contain a public key that
corresponds to the key pair
that was previously
generated through the
Generate a New Key and
Certificate Signing
Request link.
1. Make sure that the certificate
that you are importing is
correct.
2. Try to import the certificate
again.
Flash of %1 from %2 succeeded for
user %3.
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.
ElementName;
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
%3 = user ID)
Info A user has successfully
updated one of the following
firmware components:
v IMM main application
v IMM boot ROM
v Server firmware
v Diagnostics
v Integrated service
processor
No action; information only.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 59
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Flash of %1 from %2 failed for user
%3.
(%1 = CIM_ManagedElement.
ElementName;
%2 = Web or LegacyCLI;
%3 = user ID)
Info An attempt to update a
firmware component from
the interface and IP address
has failed.
Try to update the firmware again.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on
system %1 is 75% full.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Info The IMM event log is 75%
full. When the log is full,
older log entries are
replaced by newer ones.
To avoid losing older log entries,
save the log as a text file and
clear the log.
The Chassis Event Log (CEL) on
system %1 is 100% full.
(%1 = CIM_ComputerSystem.
ElementName)
Info The IMM event log is full.
When the log is full, older
log entries are replaced by
newer ones.
To avoid losing older log entries,
save the log as a text file and
clear the log.
%1 Platform Watchdog Timer expired
for %2.
(%1 = OS Watchdog or Loader
Watchdog; %2 = OS Watchdog or
Loader Watchdog)
Error A Platform Watchdog Timer
Expired event has occurred.
1. Reconfigure the watchdog
timer to a higher value.
2. Make sure that the IMM
Ethernet over USB interface
is enabled.
3. Reinstall the RNDIS or
cdc_ether device driver for
the operating system.
4. Disable the watchdog.
5. Check the integrity of the
installed operating system.
IMM Test Alert Generated by %1.
(%1 = user ID)
Info A user has generated a test
alert from the IMM.
No action; information only.
Security: Userid: '%1' had %2 login
failures from an SSH client at IP
address %3.
(%1 = user ID; %2 =
MaximumSuccessiveLoginFailures
(currently set to 5 in the firmware);
%3 = IP address, xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)
Error A user has exceeded the
maximum number of
unsuccessful login attempts
from SSH and has been
prevented from logging in for
the lockout period.
1. Make sure that the correct
login ID and password are
being used.
2. Have the system
administrator reset the login
ID or password.
60 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Checkout procedure
The checkout procedure is the sequence of tasks that you should follow to
diagnose a problem in the server.
About the checkout procedure
Before you perform the checkout procedure for diagnosing hardware problems,
review the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii.
v The diagnostic programs provide the primary methods of testing the major
components of the server, such as the system board, Ethernet controller,
keyboard, mouse (pointing device), serial ports, and hard disk drives. You can
also use them to test some external devices. If you are not sure whether a
problem is caused by the hardware or by the software, you can use the
diagnostic programs to confirm that the hardware is working correctly.
v When you run the diagnostic programs, a single problem might cause more than
one error message. When this happens, correct the cause of the first error
message. The other error messages usually will not occur the next time you run
the diagnostic programs.
Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a
microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a
microprocessor socket. See Microprocessor problems on page 70 for
information about diagnosing microprocessor problems.
v Before you run the diagnostic programs, you must determine whether the failing
server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster (two or more servers sharing
external storage devices). If it is part of a cluster, you can run all diagnostic
programs except the ones that test the storage unit (that is, a hard disk drive in
the storage unit) or the storage adapter that is attached to the storage unit. The
failing server might be part of a cluster if any of the following conditions is true:
You have identified the failing server as part of a cluster (two or more servers
sharing external storage devices).
One or more external storage units are attached to the failing server and at
least one of the attached storage units is also attached to another server or
unidentifiable device.
One or more servers are located near the failing server.
Important: If the server is part of a shared hard disk drive cluster, run one test
at a time. Do not run any suite of tests, such as quick or normal tests,
because this might enable the hard disk drive diagnostic tests.
v If the server is halted and a POST error code is displayed, see POST error
codes on page 26. If the server is halted and no error message is displayed,
see Troubleshooting tables on page 63 and Solving undetermined problems
on page 124.
v For information about power-supply problems, see Solving power problems on
page 123 and Power-supply LEDs on page 84.
v For intermittent problems, check the system-event log; see Event logs on page
23, System-event log on page 35, and Diagnostic programs, messages, and
error codes on page 85.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 61
Performing the checkout procedure
To perform the checkout procedure, complete the following steps:
1. Is the server part of a cluster?
v No: Go to step 2.
v Yes: Shut down all failing servers that are related to the cluster. Go to step 2.
2. Complete the following steps:
a. Turn off the server and all external devices.
b. Check all cables and power cords.
c. Check all internal and external devices for compatibility at
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
d. Set all display controls to the middle positions.
e. Turn on all external devices.
f. Turn on the server. If the server does not start, see Troubleshooting tables
on page 63.
g. Check the system-error LED on the operator information panel (see Server
controls, LEDs, and connectors on page 9). If it is flashing, check the light
path diagnostics LEDs (see Light path diagnostics on page 78).
h. Check for the following results:
v Successful completion of POST
v Successful completion of startup, indicated by a readable display of the
operating-system desktop
3. Are there readable instructions on the main menu?
v No: Find the failure symptom in Troubleshooting tables on page 63; if
necessary, see Solving undetermined problems on page 124.
v Yes: Run the diagnostic programs (see Running the diagnostic programs on
page 85).
If you receive an error, see Diagnostic messages on page 86.
If the diagnostic programs were completed successfully and you still
suspect a problem, see Solving undetermined problems on page 124.
62 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Troubleshooting tables
Use the troubleshooting tables to find solutions to problems that have identifiable
symptoms.
If you cannot find a problem in these tables, see Running the diagnostic programs
on page 85 for information about testing the server.
If you have just added new software or a new optional device and the server is not
working, complete the following steps before you use the troubleshooting tables:
1. Check the operator information panel and the light path diagnostics LEDs (see
Light path diagnostics on page 78).
2. Remove the software or device that you just added.
3. Run the diagnostic tests to determine whether the server is running correctly.
4. Reinstall the new software or new device.
DVD drive problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The DVD drive is not
recognized.
1. Make sure that:
v The SATA channel to which the DVD drive is attached (primary or
secondary) is enabled in the Setup utility.
v All cables and jumpers are installed correctly.
v The signal cable and connector are not damaged and the connector pins are
not bent.
v The correct device driver is installed for the DVD drive.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. DVD drive
b. DVD drive cables
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DVD drive
b. DVD drive and cables
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
A DVD is not working correctly.
1. Clean the DVD.
2. Run the DVD drive diagnostic programs.
3. Reseat the DVD drive.
4. Replace the DVD drive.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 63
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The DVD drive tray is not
working.
1. Make sure that the server is turned on.
2. Insert the end of a straightened paper clip into the manual tray-release
opening.
3. Reseat the DVD drive.
4. Replace the DVD drive.
General problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A cover lock is broken, an LED
is not working, or a similar
problem has occurred.
If the part is a CRU, replace it. If the part is a FRU, the part must be replaced by a
trained service technician.
Hard disk drive problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Not all drives are recognized by
the hard disk drive diagnostic
tests.
Remove the drive that is indicated by the diagnostic tests; then, run the hard disk
drive diagnostic tests again. If the remaining drives are recognized, replace the
drive that you removed with a new one.
The server stops responding
during the hard disk drive
diagnostic test.
Remove the hard disk drive that was being tested when the server stopped
responding, and run the diagnostic test again. If the hard disk drive diagnostic test
runs successfully, replace the drive that you removed with a new one.
A hard disk drive was not
detected while the operating
system was being started.
Reseat all hard disk drives and cables; then, run the hard disk drive diagnostic
tests again.
64 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A hard disk drive passes the
diagnostic Fixed Disk Test, but
the problem remains.
Run the diagnostic SCSI Fixed Disk Test (see Running the diagnostic programs
on page 85).
Note: This test is not available on servers that have RAID arrays or servers that
have SATA hard disk drives.
Hypervisor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action
column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127to
determine which components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which
components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must
be performed only by a Trained service technician.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check
for technical information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a request
for information.
Symptom Action
If an optional embedded
hypervisor flash device is
not listed in the expected
boot order, does not
appear in the list of boot
devices, or a similar
problem has occurred.
1. Make sure that the optional embedded hypervisor flash
device is selected on the boot manager (<F12> Select Boot
Device) at startup.
2. Make sure that the embedded hypervisor flash device is
seated in the connector correctly (see Removing a USB
embedded hypervisor flash device on page 219and
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device on page
221).
3. See the documentation that comes with the optional
embedded hypervisor flash device for setup and configuration
information.
4. Make sure that other software works on the server.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 65
Intermittent problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A problem occurs only
occasionally and is difficult to
diagnose.
1. Make sure that:
v All cables and cords are connected securely to the rear of the server and
attached devices.
v When the server is turned on, air is flowing from the fan grille. If there is no
airflow, the fan is not working. This can cause the server to overheat and
shut down.
2. Check the system-event log or IMM log (see Event logs on page 23).
3. See Solving undetermined problems on page 124.
Keyboard, mouse, or pointing-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
All or some keys on the
keyboard do not work.
1. Make sure that:
v The keyboard cable is securely connected.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
2. See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ for keyboard
compatibility.
3. If you are using a USB keyboard, run the Setup utility and enable keyboardless
operation to prevent the 301 POST error message from being displayed during
startup.
4. If you are using a USB keyboard and it is connected to a USB hub, disconnect
the keyboard from the hub and connect it directly to the server.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Keyboard
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
66 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The mouse or pointing device
does not work.
1. Make sure that:
v The mouse or pointing device is compatible with the server. See
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
v The mouse or pointing-device cable is securely connected to the server.
v The mouse or pointing-device device drivers are installed correctly.
v The server and the monitor are turned on.
v The mouse is enabled in the Setup utility.
2. If you are using a USB mouse or pointing device and it is connected to a USB
hub, disconnect the mouse or pointing device from the hub and connect it
directly to the server.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Mouse or pointing device
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 67
Memory problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The amount of system memory
that is displayed is less than the
amount of installed physical
memory.
1. Make sure that:
v No error LEDs are lit on the operator information panel or on the DIMM.
v Memory mirroring does not account for the discrepancy.
v The memory modules are seated correctly.
v You have installed the correct type of memory.
v If you changed the memory, you updated the memory configuration in the
Setup utility.
v All banks of memory are enabled. The server might have automatically
disabled a memory bank when it detected a problem, or a memory bank
might have been manually disabled.
2. Check the POST error log:
v If a DIMM was disabled by a systems-management interrupt (SMI), replace
the DIMM.
v If a DIMM was disabled by the user or by POST, run the Setup utility and
enable the DIMM.
3. Run memory diagnostics (see Running the diagnostic programs on page 85).
4. Make sure that there is no memory mismatch when the server is at the
minimum memory configuration (one 1 GB DIMM); see the information about
the minimum required configuration on page Solving undetermined problems
on page 124).
5. Add one pair of DIMMs at a time, making sure that the DIMMs in each pair
match.
6. Reseat the DIMMs, and then restart the server.
7. Reverse the DIMMs between the channels (of the same microprocessor), and
then restart the server. If the problem is related to a DIMM, replace the failing
DIMM.
8. (Trained service technician only) Install the failing DIMM into a DIMM connector
for microprocessor 2 (if installed) to verify that the problem is not the
microprocessor or the DIMM connector.
9. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
68 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Multiple rows of DIMMs in a
branch are identified as failing.
1. Reseat the DIMMs; then, restart the server.
2. Remove the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those that are identified and
replace it with an identical pair of known good DIMMs; then, restart the server.
Repeat as necessary. If the failures continue after all identified pairs are
replaced, go to step4.
3. Return the removed DIMMs, one pair at a time, to their original connectors,
restarting the server after each pair, until a pair fails. Replace each DIMM in the
failed pair with an identical known good DIMM, restarting the server after each
DIMM. Replace the failed DIMM. Repeat step 3 until you have tested all
removed DIMMs.
4. Replace the lowest-numbered DIMM pair of those identified; then, restart the
server. Repeat as necessary.
5. Reverse the DIMMs between the channels (of the same microprocessor), and
then restart the server. If the problem is related to a DIMM, replace the failing
DIMM.
6. (Trained service technician only) Install the failing DIMM into a DIMM connector
for microprocessor 2 (if installed) to verify that the problem is not the
microprocessor or the DIMM connector.
7. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 69
Microprocessor problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The server emits a continuous
beep during POST, indicating
that the startup (boot)
microprocessor is not working
correctly.
1. Correct any errors that are indicated by the light path diagnostics LEDs (see
Light path diagnostics on page 78).
2. Make sure that the server supports all the microprocessors and that the
microprocessors match in speed and cache size.
3. (Trained service technician only) Reseat microprocessor 1
4. (Trained service technician only) If there is no indication of which
microprocessor has failed, isolate the error by testing with one microprocessor
at a time.
5. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Microprocessor 2
b. VRM
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
6. (Trained service technician only) If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics
LEDs indicate a microprocessor error, reverse the locations of two
microprocessors to determine whether the error is associated with a
microprocessor or with a microprocessor socket.
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor, replace the microprocessor.
v If the error is associated with a VRM, replace the VRM.
v If the error is associated with a microprocessor socket, replace the system
board.
70 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Monitor problems
Some IBM monitors have their own self-tests. If you suspect a problem with your
monitor, see the documentation that comes with the monitor for instructions for
testing and adjusting the monitor.
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
Testing the monitor
1. Make sure that the monitor cables are firmly connected.
2. Try using a different monitor on the server, or try using the monitor that is being
tested on a different server.
3. Run the diagnostic programs. If the monitor passes the diagnostic programs,
the problem might be a video device driver.
4. (Trained service technician only) Replace the system board.
The screen is blank.
1. If the server is attached to a KVM switch, bypass the KVM switch to eliminate it
as a possible cause of the problem: connect the monitor cable directly to the
correct connector on the rear of the server.
2. Make sure that:
v The server is turned on. If there is no power to the server, see Power
problems on page 74.
v The monitor cables are connected correctly.
v The monitor is turned on and the brightness and contrast controls are
adjusted correctly.
v No POST errors are generated when the server is turned on.
3. Make sure that the correct server is controlling the monitor, if applicable.
4. See Solving undetermined problems on page 124.
The monitor works when you
turn on the server, but the
screen goes blank when you
start some application
programs.
1. Make sure that:
v The application program is not setting a display mode that is higher than the
capability of the monitor.
v You installed the necessary device drivers for the application.
2. Run video diagnostics (see Running the diagnostic programs on page 85).
v If the server passes the video diagnostics, the video is good; see Solving
undetermined problems on page 124.
v (Trained service technician only) If the server fails the video diagnostics,
replace the system board.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 71
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The monitor has screen jitter, or
the screen image is wavy,
unreadable, rolling, or distorted.
1. If the monitor self-tests show that the monitor is working correctly, consider the
location of the monitor. Magnetic fields around other devices (such as
transformers, appliances, fluorescent lights, and other monitors) can cause
screen jitter or wavy, unreadable, rolling, or distorted screen images. If this
happens, turn off the monitor.
Attention: Moving a color monitor while it is turned on might cause screen
discoloration.
Move the device and the monitor at least 305 mm (12 in.) apart, and turn on
the monitor.
Notes:
a. To prevent diskette drive read/write errors, make sure that the distance
between the monitor and any external diskette drive is at least 76 mm (3
in.).
b. Non-IBM monitor cables might cause unpredictable problems.
2. Reseat the monitor.
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Wrong characters appear on the
screen.
1. If the wrong language is displayed, update the server firmware with the correct
language (see Updating the firmware on page 286).
2. Reseat the monitor
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Monitor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
72 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Optional-device problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
An IBM optional device that was
just installed does not work.
1. Make sure that:
v The device is designed for the server (see http://www.ibm.com/servers/
eserver/serverproven/compat/us/).
v You followed the installation instructions that came with the device and the
device is installed correctly.
v You have not loosened any other installed devices or cables.
v You updated the configuration information in the Setup utility. Whenever
memory or any other device is changed, you must update the configuration.
2. Reseat the device that you just installed.
3. Replace the device that you just installed.
An IBM optional device that
used to work does not work
now.
1. Make sure that all of the hardware and cable connections for the device are
secure.
2. If the device comes with test instructions, use those instructions to test the
device.
3. If the failing device is a SCSI device, make sure that:
v The cables for all external SCSI devices are connected correctly.
v The last device in each SCSI chain, or the end of the SCSI cable, is
terminated correctly.
v Any external SCSI device is turned on. You must turn on an external SCSI
device before you turn on the server.
4. Reseat the failing device.
5. Replace the failing device.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 73
Power problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The power-control button does
not work (the server does not
start).
Note: The power-control button
will not function until 20
seconds after the server has
been connected to AC power.
1. Make sure that the power-control button is working correctly:
a. Disconnect the server power cords.
b. Reconnect the power cords.
c. (Trained service technician only) Reseat the operator information panel
cables, and then repeat steps 1a and 1b. If the server starts, reseat the
operator information panel. If the problem remains, replace the operator
information panel.
2. Make sure that:
v The power cords are correctly connected to the server and to a working
electrical outlet.
v The type of memory that is installed is correct.
v The DIMM is fully seated.
v The LEDs on the power supply do not indicate a problem.
v The microprocessors are installed in the correct sequence.
3. Reseat the following components:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane
4. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. DIMMs
b. (Trained service technician only) Power switch connector
c. (Trained service technician only) Power backplane
d. (Trained service technician only) System board
5. If you just installed an optional device, remove it, and restart the server. If the
server now starts, you might have installed more devices than the power supply
supports.
6. See Power-supply LEDs on page 84.
7. See Solving undetermined problems on page 124.
The server does not turn off.
1. Determine whether you are using an Advanced Configuration and Power
Interface (ACPI) or a non-ACPI operating system. If you are using a non-ACPI
operating system, complete the following steps:
a. Press Ctrl+Alt+Delete.
b. Turn off the server by pressing the power-control button for 5 seconds.
c. Restart the server.
d. If the server fails POST and the power-control button does not work,
disconnect the power cord for 20 seconds; then, reconnect the power cord
and restart the server.
2. If the problem remains or if you are using an ACPI-aware operating system,
suspect the system board.
74 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The server unexpectedly shuts
down, and the LEDs on the
operator information panel are
not lit.
See Solving undetermined problems on page 124.
Serial port problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The number of serial ports that
are identified by the operating
system is less than the number
of installed serial ports.
1. Make sure that:
v Each port is assigned a unique address in the Setup utility and none of the
serial ports is disabled.
v The serial port adapter (if one is present) is seated correctly.
2. Reseat the serial port adapter.
3. Replace the serial port adapter.
A serial device does not work.
1. Make sure that:
v The device is compatible with the server.
v The serial port is enabled and is assigned a unique address.
v The device is connected to the correct connector.
2. Reseat the following components:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
3. Replace the following components one at a time, in the order shown, restarting
the server each time:
a. Failing serial device
b. Serial cable
c. (Trained service technician only) System board
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 75
ServerGuide problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
The ServerGuide Setup and
Installation CD will not start.
1. Make sure that the server supports the ServerGuide program and has a
startable (bootable) DVD drive.
2. If the startup (boot) sequence settings have been changed, make sure that the
DVD drive is first in the startup sequence.
3. If more than one DVD drive is installed, make sure that only one drive is set as
the primary drive. Start the CD from the primary drive.
The ServeRAID Manager
program cannot view all
installed drives, or the operating
system cannot be installed.
1. Make sure that the hard disk drive is connected correctly.
2. Make sure that the SAS hard disk drive cables are securely connected.
The operating-system
installation program
continuously loops.
Make more space available on the hard disk.
The ServerGuide program will
not start the operating-system
CD.
Make sure that the operating-system CD is supported by the ServerGuide program.
Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/serverguide/sub.html, click IBM
Service and Support Site, click the link for your ServerGuide version, and scroll
down to the list of supported Microsoft Windows operating systems.
The operating system cannot be
installed; the option is not
available.
Make sure that the server supports the operating system. If it does, either no
logical drive is defined (SCSI RAID servers), or the ServerGuide System Partition
is not present. Run the ServerGuide program and make sure that setup is
complete.
76 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Software problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
You suspect a software
problem.
1. To determine whether the problem is caused by the software, make sure that:
v The server has the minimum memory that is needed to use the software. For
memory requirements, see the information that comes with the software. If
you have just installed an adapter or memory, the server might have a
memory-address conflict.
v The software is designed to operate on the server.
v Other software works on the server.
v The software works on another server.
2. If you receive any error messages while you use the software, see the
information that comes with the software for a description of the messages and
suggested solutions to the problem.
3. Contact the software vendor.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) port problems
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Symptom Action
A USB device does not work.
1. Run USB diagnostics (see Running the diagnostic programs on page 85).
2. Make sure that:
v The correct USB device driver is installed.
v The operating system supports USB devices.
v A standard PS/2 keyboard or mouse is not connected to the server. If it is, a
USB keyboard or mouse will not work during POST.
3. Make sure that the USB configuration optional devices are set correctly in the
Setup utility (see Setup utility menu choices on page 287 for more
information).
4. If you are using a USB hub, disconnect the USB device from the hub and
connect it directly to the server.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 77
Light path diagnostics
Light path diagnostics is a system of LEDs on various external and internal
components of the server. When an error occurs, LEDs are lit throughout the
server. By viewing the LEDs in a particular order, you can often identify the source
of the error.
When LEDs are lit to indicate an error, they remain lit when the server is turned off,
provided that the server is still connected to power and the power supply is
operating correctly.
Before you work inside the server to view light path diagnostics LEDs, read the
safety information that begins on page vii and Handling static-sensitive devices on
page 137.
If an error occurs, view the light path diagnostics LEDs in the following order:
1. Look at the operator information panel LEDs on the front of the server.
v If an operator information panel LED is lit, it indicates that information about a
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the system-event log.
The following table lists the operator information panel LEDs, the problems that
they indicate, and actions to solve the problems.
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path diagnostics LED with the
system-error or information LED also lit Description
System power (green)
v Off: AC power is not present, or the power supply or the LED itself
has failed.
v Flashing rapidly (4 times per second): The server is turned off
and is not ready to be turned on. The power-control button is
disabled. This will last approximately 20 to 40 seconds.
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to ac
power, the power-control button becomes active.
v Flashing slowly (once per second): The server is turned off and is
ready to be turned on. You can press the power-control button to
turn on the server.
v Lit: The server is turned on.
v Fading on and off: The server is in a reduced-power state. To
wake the server, press the power-control button or use the IMM
Web interface.
Hard disk drive activity (green) When this LED is flashing rapidly, it indicates that there is activity on a
hard disk drive.
System locator (blue) Use this LED to visually locate the server among other servers. You
can use IBM Systems Director to light this LED remotely.
System information (amber) When this amber LED is lit, it indicates that information about a
suboptimal condition in the server is available in the IMM event log or
in the system-event log.
78 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See the Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path diagnostics LED with the
system-error or information LED also lit Description
System error (amber) When this LED is lit, it indicates that a system error has occurred. Use
the system service label to further isolate the error.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 79
2. Remove the server cover and look inside the server for lit LEDs. Certain
components inside the server have LEDs that are lit to indicate the location of a
problem.
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the system board.
80 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The system board is equipped with a PCI extender card that provides either one
or two additional expansion slots. The following illustration shows the LEDs on
the PCI Express extender card, if one is installed.
The following illustration shows the LEDs on the PCI-X extender card, if one is
installed.
The following table describes the LEDs on the system board and extender card
and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
DIMM 1 to DIMM 16
error LEDs
A DIMM has failed or is incorrectly
installed.
1. Remove the DIMM that is indicated by a lit error
LED.
2. Reseat the DIMM.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. DIMM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU 1 error LED Microprocessor 1 has failed, is
missing, or has been incorrectly
installed.
Note: (Trained service technician
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence; see Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink on
page 271.
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED.
2. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
microprocessor.
3. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 81
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
CPU 2 error LED Microprocessor 2 has failed, is
missing, or has been incorrectly
installed.
Note: (Trained service technician
only) Make sure that the
microprocessors are installed in the
correct sequence; see Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink on
page 271.
1. Check the system-event log to determine the
reason for the lit LED.
2. Find the failing, missing, or mismatched
microprocessor by checking the LEDs on the
system board.
3. (Trained service technician) Reseat the failing
microprocessor.
4. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. (Trained service technician only) Failing
microprocessor
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
CPU mismatch LED A mismatched microprocessor has
been installed.
Note: All microprocessors must
have the same speed and cache
size.
1. Run the Setup utility and view the microprocessor
information to compare the installed
microprocessor specifications.
2. (Trained service technician only) Remove and
replace one of the microprocessors so that they
both match.
VRM failure LED Microprocessor 2 VRM has failed or
is incorrectly installed.
1. Reseat the VRM
2. Replace the following components one at a time,
in the order shown, restarting the server each time:
a. VRM
b. (Trained service technician only) System board
3. Replace the VRM
System board error
LED
System board CPU VRD, power
voltage regulators, or both have
failed.
(Trained service technician only) Replace the system
board.
Battery failure LED Battery low.
1. Replace the CMOS lithium battery, if necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
82 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem
is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which
components are customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units
(FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a
trained service technician.
Lit light path
diagnostics LED with
the system-error or
information LED also
lit Description Action
IMM heartbeat LED Indicates the status of the boot
process of the IMM.
When the server is connected to
power this LED flashes quickly to
indicate that the IMM code is
loading. When the loading is
complete, the LED stops flashing
briefly and then flashes slowly to
indicate that the IMM if fully
operational and you can press the
power-control button to start the
server.
If the LED does not begin flashing within 30 seconds
of when the server is connected to power, complete
the following steps:
1. (Trained service technician only) Use the IMM
recovery switch to recover the firmware (see
Table 5 on page 17).
2. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
PCI slot 1 to PCI slot
8 error LEDs
An error has occurred on a PCI bus
or on the system board. An
additional LED is lit next to a failing
PCI slot.
1. Check the system-event log for information about
the error.
2. If you cannot isolate the failing adapter through the
LEDs and the information in the system-event log,
remove one adapter at a time, and restart the
server after each adapter is removed.
3. If the failure remains, go to http://www.ibm.com/
systems/support/supportsite.wss/
docdisplay?brandind=5000008&lndocid=SERV-
CALL for additional troubleshooting information. for
additional troubleshooting information.
H8 heartbeat LED Indicates the status of power-on and
power-off sequencing.
1. If the H8 heartbeat LED is blinking at a 1 Hz rate,
no action is necessary.
2. (Trained service technician only) If the H8
heartbeat LED is not blinking, replace the system
board.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 83
Power-supply LEDs
The following illustration shows the power-supply LEDs on the rear of the server.
Power cord
connector
AC power LED
DC power LED
Fault (error) LED
The following table describes the problems that are indicated by various
combinations of the power-supply LEDs and the power-on LED on the front
information panel and suggested actions to correct the detected problems.
Table 7. Power-supply LEDs
Power-supply LEDs
Description Action Notes AC DC Error
Off Off Off No AC power to
the server or a
problem with the
AC power source
1. Check the AC power to the server.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
3. Turn the server off and then turn the
server back on.
4. If the problem remains, replace the
power supply.
This is a normal
condition when no
AC power is
present.
Off Off On No AC power to
the server or a
problem with the
AC power source
and the power
supply had
detected an
internal problem
1. Replace the power supply.
2. Make sure that the power cord is
connected to a functioning power
source.
This happens only
when a second
power supply is
providing power to
the server.
Off On Off Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
Off On On Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
On Off Off Power supply not
fully seated,
faulty system
board, or faulty
power supply
1. If the system board error (fault) LED is
not lit, replace the power supply.
2. If the system board error (fault) LED is
lit, (Trained service technician only)
replace the system board.
Typically indicates
that a power supply
is not fully seated.
On Off or
Flashing
On Faulty power
supply
Replace the power supply.
On On Off Normal operation
On On On Power supply is
faulty but still
operational
Replace the power supply.
84 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Diagnostic programs, messages, and error codes
The diagnostic programs are the primary method of testing the major components
of the server. As you run the diagnostic programs, text messages and error codes
are displayed on the screen and are saved in the test log. A diagnostic text
message or error code indicates that a problem has been detected; to determine
what action you should take as a result of a message or error code, see the table in
Diagnostic messages on page 86.
Running the diagnostic programs
To run the diagnostic programs, complete the following steps:
1. If the server is running, turn off the server and all attached devices.
2. Turn on all attached devices; then, turn on the server.
3. When the prompt Press F2 for Dynamic System Analysis (DSA) is displayed,
press F2.
Note: DSA Preboot might appear to be unresponsive when you start the
program. This is normal operation while the program loads. The loading process
may take up to 10 minutes.
4. Optionally, select Quit to DSA to exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic
program.
Note: After you exit from the stand-alone memory diagnostic environment, you
must restart the server to access the stand-alone memory diagnostic
environment again.
5. Type gui to display the graphical user interface, or select cmd to display the
DSA interactive menu.
6. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the diagnostic test to run.
If the diagnostic programs do not detect any hardware errors but the problem
remains during normal server operations, a software error might be the cause. If
you suspect a software problem, see the information that comes with your software.
A single problem might cause more than one error message. When this happens,
correct the cause of the first error message. The other error messages usually will
not occur the next time you run the diagnostic programs.
Exception: If multiple error codes or light path diagnostics LEDs indicate a
microprocessor error, the error might be in a microprocessor or in a microprocessor
socket. See Microprocessor problems on page 70 for information about diagnosing
microprocessor problems.
If the server stops during testing and you cannot continue, restart the server and try
running the diagnostic programs again. If the problem remains, replace the
component that was being tested when the server stopped.
Diagnostic text messages
Diagnostic text messages are displayed while the tests are running. A diagnostic
text message contains one of the following results:
Passed: The test was completed without any errors.
Failed: The test detected an error.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 85
User Aborted: You stopped the test before it was completed.
Not Applicable: You attempted to test a device that is not present in the server.
Aborted: The test could not proceed because of the server configuration.
Warning: The test could not be run. There was no failure of the hardware that was
being tested, but there might be a hardware failure elsewhere, or another problem
prevented the test from running; for example, there might be a configuration
problem, or the hardware might be missing or is not being recognized.
The result is followed by an error code or other additional information about the
error.
Viewing the test log
To view the DSA log when the tests are completed, select Utility from the top of the
screen and then select View Test Log. To view a detailed test log, press Tab while
you view the DSA log. The DSA log data is maintained only while you are running
the diagnostic programs. When you exit from the diagnostic programs, the DSA log
is cleared.
To save the DSA log to a file on a diskette or to the hard disk, click Save Log on
the diagnostic programs screen and specify a location and name for the saved log
file.
Notes:
1. To create and use a diskette, you must add an optional external diskette drive to
the server.
2. To save the test log to a diskette, you must use a diskette that you have
formatted yourself; this function does not work with preformatted diskettes. If the
diskette has sufficient space for the test log, the diskette can contain other data.
Diagnostic messages
The following table describes the messages that the diagnostic programs might
generate and suggested actions to correct the detected problems. Follow the
suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the column.
Table 8. DSA messages
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-000-xxx CPU CPU Stress
test
Pass CPU passed
stress test
No action required.
86 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-801-xxx CPU CPU Stress
Test
Aborted Internal
program error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 87
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-802-xxx CPU CPU Stress
Test
Aborted System
resource
availability
error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
88 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
089-901-xxx CPU CPU Stress
Test
Failed Test failure.
1. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
5. Run the test again.
6. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
7. Run the test again.
8. Replace the following components one at a
time, in the order shown, and run this test again
to determine whether the problem has been
solved:
a. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor board
b. (Trained service technician only)
Microprocessor
9. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-801-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: the
IMM returned
an incorrect
response
length.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 89
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-802-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: the
test cannot be
completed for
an unknown
reason.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-803-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: the
node is busy;
try later.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
90 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-804-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: invalid
command.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-805-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: invalid
command for
the given LUN.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 91
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-806-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
timeout while
processing the
command.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-807-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: out of
space.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
92 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-808-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
reservation
aborted or
invalid
reservation ID.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-809-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
request data
was truncated.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 93
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-810-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
request data
length is
invalid.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-811-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
request data
field length limit
is exceeded.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
94 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-812-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C Test
stopped a
parameter is
out of range.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-813-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot return
the number of
requested data
bytes.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 95
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-814-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
requested
sensor, data, or
record is not
present.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-815-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: invalid
data field in the
request.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
96 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-816-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: the
command is
illegal for the
specified
sensor or
record type.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-817-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
provided.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 97
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-818-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot execute
a duplicated
request.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-819-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
provided; the
SDR repository
is in update
mode.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
98 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-820-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
provided; the
device is in
firmware
update mode.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code and IMM firmware
are at the latest level.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-821-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: a
command
response could
not be
provided; IMM
initialization is
in progress.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 99
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-822-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped: the
destination is
unavailable.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-823-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot execute
the command;
insufficient
privilege level.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
100 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-824-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Aborted IMM I2C test
stopped:
cannot execute
the command.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the latest
level. The installed firmware level is shown in
the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
166-901-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
H8 bus (Bus 0)
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. Remove power from the system.
8. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to power and turn on
the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 101
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-902-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
I/O Expander
(Bus 1).
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
9. Run the test again.
10. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
11. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
12. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
13. Run the test again.
14. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
102 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-903-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
host bus (Bus
2).
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. Disconnect the system from the power source.
8. Replace the DIMMs one at a time, and run the
test again after replacing each DIMM.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Reseat all of the DIMMs.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
16. (Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
17. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
18. Run the test again.
19. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 103
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-904-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
power supply
bus (Bus 3).
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. Reseat the power supply.
8. Run the test again.
9. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
10. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
11. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
12. Run the test again.
13. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
104 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-905-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
SAS backplane
and the Sensor
bus (Bus 4)
Note: Ignore the error if the hard disk drive
backplane is not installed.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Reseat the hard disk drive backplane.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
12. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
13. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
14. Run the test again.
15. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 105
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
166-906-xxx IMM IMM I2C Test Failed The IMM
indicates a
failure in the
PCI bus (Bus
5).
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source. You must disconnect the system
from AC power to reset the IMM.
2. After 45 seconds, reconnect the system to the
power source and turn on the system.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the IMM firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
8. Trained service technician only) Replace the
system board.
9. Reconnect the system to the power source and
turn on the system.
10. Run the test again.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-801-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
the server
firmware
programmed
the memory
controller with
an invalid
CBAR address
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
106 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-802-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
the end
address in the
E820 function
is less than 16
MB.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that all DIMMs are enabled in the
Setup utility.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-803-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
could not
enable the
processor
cache.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-804-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
the memory
controller buffer
request failed.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 107
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-805-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
the memory
controller
display/alter
write operation
was not
completed.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-806-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
the memory
controller fast
scrub operation
was not
completed.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-807-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
the memory
controller buffer
free request
failed.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
108 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-808-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted:
memory
controller
display/alter
buffer execute
error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-809-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test aborted
program error:
operation
running fast
scrub.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
201-810-xxx Memory Memory Test Aborted Test stopped:
unknown error
code xxx
received in
COMMONEXIT
procedure.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Run the test again.
3. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
4. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 109
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
201-901-xxx Memory Memory Test Failed Test failure:
single-bit error,
failing bank x,
failing memory
card y, failing
DIMM z.
1. Turn off the system and disconnect it from the
power source.
2. Reseat DIMM z.
3. Reconnect the system to power and turn on
the system.
4. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
5. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the failing DIMMs.
8. Re-enable all memory in the Setup utility (see
Using the Setup utility on page 287).
9. Run the test again.
10. Replace the failing DIMM.
11. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-801-xxx Memory Memory
Stress Test
Aborted Internal
program error.
1. Turn off and restart the system.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Make sure that the server firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
4. Run the test again.
5. Turn off and restart the system if necessary to
recover from a hung state.
6. Run the memory diagnostics to identify the
specific failing DIMM.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
110 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
202-802-xxx Memory Memory
Stress Test
Failed General error:
memory size is
insufficient to
run the test.
1. Make sure that all memory is enabled by
checking the Available System Memory in the
Resource Utilization section of the DSA log. If
necessary, enable all memory in the Setup utility
(see Using the Setup utility on page 287).
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Run the test again.
4. Run the standard memory test to validate all
memory.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
202-901-xxx Memory Memory
Stress Test
Failed Test failure.
1. Run the standard memory test to validate all
memory.
2. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
3. Turn off the system and disconnect it from
power.
4. Reseat the DIMMs.
5. Reconnect the system to power and turn on the
system.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 111
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-801-xxx Optical Drive
v Verify
Media
Installed
v Read/
Write Test
v Self-Test
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
Aborted Unable to
communicate
with the device
driver.
1. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go
to http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the system firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is
shown in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. For more
information, see Updating the firmware on
page 286.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
112 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-802-xxx Optical Drive
v Verify
Media
Installed
v Read/
Write Test
v Self-Test
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
Aborted The media tray
is open.
1. Close the media tray and wait 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
3. Insert a new CD/DVD into the drive and wait
for 15 seconds for the media to be recognized.
4. Run the test again.
5. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
6. Run the test again.
7. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
8. Run the test again.
9. For additional troubleshooting information, go
to http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
10. Run the test again.
11. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
12. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-803-xxx Optical Drive
v Verify
Media
Installed
v Read/
Write Test
v Self-Test
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
Failed The disc might
be in use by
the system.
1. Wait for the system activity to stop.
2. Run the test again
3. Turn off and restart the system.
4. Run the test again.
5. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 113
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-901-xxx Optical Drive
v Verify
Media
Installed
v Read/
Write Test
v Self-Test
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
Aborted Drive media is
not detected.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-902-xxx Optical Drive
v Verify
Media
Installed
v Read/
Write Test
v Self-Test
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
Failed Read
miscompare.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
114 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
215-903-xxx Optical Drive
v Verify
Media
Installed
v Read/
Write Test
v Self-Test
Messages
and actions
apply to all
three tests.
Aborted Could not
access the
drive.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the DSA code is at the latest
level. For the latest level of DSA code, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1SERV-DSA.
6. Run the test again.
7. For additional troubleshooting information, go
to http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
8. Run the test again.
9. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
10. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site
for more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
215-904-xxx Optical Drive
v Verify
Media
Installed
v Read/
Write Test
Messages
and actions
apply to both
tests.
Failed A read error
occurred.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the drive or try a new
media, and wait for 15 seconds.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the drive cabling at both ends for loose
or broken connections or damage to the cable.
Replace the cable if it is damaged.
4. Run the test again.
5. For additional troubleshooting information, go to
http://www.ibm.com/support/
docview.wss?uid=psg1MIGR-41559.
6. Run the test again.
7. Replace the CD/DVD drive.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
217800000 SAS/SATA
Hard Drive
Disk Drive
Test
Aborted Test aborted. Run the test again.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 115
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
217-900-xxx SAS/SATA
Hard Drive
Disk Drive
Test
Failed
1. Reseat all hard disk drive backplane
connections at both ends.
2. Reseat the all drives.
3. Run the test again.
4. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level.
5. Run the test again.
6. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-901-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive
Test
Failed An error was
found in the
tape alert log
page.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-902-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive
Test
Failed Media is not
detected.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
116 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
264-903-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive
Test
Failed Media error.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-904-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive
Test
Failed Drive hardware
error.
1. Check the tape drive cabling for loose or broken
connections or damage to the cable. Replace
the tape drive cable if damage is present.
2. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
3. Run the test again.
4. Clear the error log.
5. Run the test again.
6. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
7. Run the test again.
8. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 117
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
264-905-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive
Test
Failed Software error:
invalid request.
1. If the system has stopped responding, turn off
and restart the system and then run the test
again.
2. Check system firmware level and upgrade if
necessary. The installed firmware level can be
found in the DSA Log within the Firmware/VPD
section for this component. The latest level
firmware for this component can be found at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
3. Run the test again.
4. If the system has stopped responding, turn off
and restart the system.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
264-906-000 Tape Drive Tape Drive
Test
Failed Unrecognized
error.
1. Clean the tape drive using the appropriate
cleaning media and install new media.
2. Run the test again.
3. Clear the error log.
4. Run the test again.
5. Make sure that the firmware is at the latest
level. Software for tape drives and libraries can
be found at http://www.ibm.com/systems/
support/.
6. Run the test again.
7. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
118 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-901-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Control
Registers
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-901-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test MII
Registers
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-902-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test
EEPROM
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 119
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-903-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Internal
Memory
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA log. If the Ethernet
device is sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility (see Using the Setup utility on
page 287) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-904-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Interrupt Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
2. Run the test again.
3. Check the interrupt assignments in the PCI
Hardware section of the DSA log. If the Ethernet
device is sharing interrupts, if possible, use the
Setup utility (see Using the Setup utility on
page 287) to assign a unique interrupt to the
device.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
120 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 8. DSA messages (continued)
v Follow the suggested actions in the order in which they are listed in the Action column until the problem is solved.
v See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to determine which components are
customer replaceable units (CRU) and which components are field replaceable units (FRU).
v If an action step is preceded by (Trained service technician only), that step must be performed only by a Trained
service technician.
Message
number Component Test State Description Action
405-905-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Loop
back at
MAC-Layer
Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-906-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test Loop
back at
Physical
Layer
Failed
1. Check the Ethernet cable for damage and make
sure that the cable type and connection are
correct.
2. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
3. Run the test again.
4. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
5. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
405-907-xxx Broadcom
Ethernet
Device
Test LEDs Failed
1. Make sure that the component firmware is at the
latest level. The installed firmware level is shown
in the DSA log in the Firmware/VPD section for
this component. For more information, see
Updating the firmware on page 286.
2. Run the test again.
3. Replace the component that is causing the error.
If the error is caused by an adapter, replace the
adapter. Check the PCI Information and Network
Settings information in the DSA log to determine
the physical location of the failing component.
4. If the failure remains, go to the IBM Web site for
more troubleshooting information at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/
supportsite.wss/docdisplay?brandind=5000008
&lndocid=SERV-CALL.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 121
Recovering from an IBM System x Server Firmware update failure
If power to the server is interrupted while you are updating the IBM System x
Server Firmware, the server might not restart correctly or might not display video. If
this happens, complete the following steps to recover:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Locate JP6 on the system board and remove any adapters that impede access
to the jumpers.
5. Move jumper JP6 to pins 2 and 3 to enable the UEFI recovery mode.
6. Replace any adapters that you removed; then, install the left-side cover (see
Installing the left-side cover on page 166).
7. Reconnect all external cables and power cords.
8. Insert the update CD into the CD or DVD drive.
9. Turn on the server and the monitor.
After the update session is completed, remove the CD from the drive and turn
off the server.
10. Disconnect all power cords and external cables.
11. Remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on page 166).
12. Remove any adapters that impede access to jumper JP6.
13. Move jumper JP6 to back to pins 1 and 2 for normal operation.
14. Replace any adapters that you removed; then, install the left-side cover (see
Installing the left-side cover on page 166).
15. Lock the left-side cover if you unlocked it during removal.
16. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
The function of each switch and jumper on the system board is described in
System board switches and jumpers on page 17.
122 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Solving power problems
Power problems can be difficult to solve. For example, a short circuit can exist
anywhere on any of the power distribution buses. Usually, a short circuit will cause
the power subsystem to shut down because of an overcurrent condition. To
diagnose a power problem, use the following general procedure:
1. Turn off the server and disconnect all AC power cords.
2. Check for loose cables in the power subsystem. Also check for short circuits, for
example, if a loose screw is causing a short circuit on a circuit board.
3. Remove the adapters and disconnect the cables and power cords to all internal
and external devices until the server is at the minimum configuration that is
required for the server to start (see Solving undetermined problems on page
124 for the minimum configuration).
4. Reconnect all AC power cords and turn on the server. If the server starts
successfully, replace the adapters and devices one at a time until the problem is
isolated.
If the server does not start from the minimum configuration, replace the components
in the minimum configuration one at a time until the problem is isolated.
Solving Ethernet controller problems
The method that you use to test the Ethernet controller depends on which operating
system you are using. See the operating-system documentation for information
about Ethernet controllers, and see the Ethernet controller device-driver readme file.
Try the following procedures:
v Make sure that the correct device drivers, which come with the server, are
installed and that they are at the latest level.
v Make sure that the Ethernet cable is installed correctly.
The cable must be securely attached at all connections. If the cable is
attached but the problem remains, try a different cable.
If the Ethernet controller is set to operate at 100 Mbps, you must use
Category 5 cabling.
If you directly connect two servers (without a hub), or if you are not using a
hub with X ports, use a crossover cable. To determine whether a hub has an
X port, check the port label. If the label contains an X, the hub has an X port.
v Determine whether the hub supports auto-negotiation. If it does not, try
configuring the integrated Ethernet controller manually to match the speed and
duplex mode of the hub.
v Check the Ethernet controller LEDs on the rear panel of the server. These LEDs
indicate whether there is a problem with the connector, cable, or hub.
The Ethernet link status LED is lit when the Ethernet controller receives a link
pulse from the hub. If the LED is off, there might be a defective connector or
cable or a problem with the hub.
The Ethernet transmit/receive activity LED is lit when the Ethernet controller
sends or receives data over the Ethernet network. If the Ethernet
transmit/receive activity light is off, make sure that the hub and network are
operating and that the correct device drivers are installed.
v Check the LAN activity LEDs on the rear of the server. The LAN activity LED is lit
when data is active on the Ethernet network. If the LAN activity LED is off, make
sure that the hub and network are operating and that the correct device drivers
are installed.
v Check for operating-system-specific causes of the problem.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 123
v Make sure that the device drivers on the client and server are using the same
protocol.
If the Ethernet controller still cannot connect to the network but the hardware
appears to be working, the network administrator must investigate other possible
causes of the error.
Solving undetermined problems
If the diagnostic tests did not diagnose the failure or if the server is inoperative, use
the information in this section.
If you suspect that a software problem is causing failures (continuous or
intermittent), see Software problems on page 77.
Damaged data in CMOS memory or damaged IBM System x Server Firmware can
cause undetermined problems. To reset the CMOS data, use the password switch 2
(SW4) to override the power-on password and clear the CMOS memory; see
Internal LEDs, connectors, and jumpers on page 15.
Check the LEDs on all the power supplies (see Power-supply LEDs on page 84).
If the LEDs indicate that the power supplies are working correctly, complete the
following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Make sure that the server is cabled correctly.
3. Remove or disconnect the following devices, one at a time, until you find the
failure. Turn on the server and reconfigure it each time.
v Any external devices.
v Surge-suppressor device (on the server).
v Modem, printer, mouse, and non-IBM devices.
v Each adapter.
v Hard disk drives.
Note: If you install a ServeRAID-M1015 SAS/SATA adapter, make sure at
least 2 GB of memory is installed in the server before you run DSA from a
bootable CD.
The following minimum configuration is required for the server to start:
v One microprocessor
v One 1 GB DIMM
Note: If you install a ServeRAID-M1015 SAS/SATA adapter, make sure at least 2
GB of memory is installed in the server before you run DSA from a bootable CD.
v One power supply
v Power cord
v ServeRAID SAS adapter
v System board assembly
4. Turn on the server. If the problem remains, suspect the following components in
the following order:
a. Power supply
b. Power-supply cage
c. Memory
d. Microprocessor
e. System board
124 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
If the problem is solved when you remove an adapter from the server but the
problem recurs when you reinstall the same adapter, suspect the adapter; if the
problem recurs when you replace the adapter with a different one, suspect the
system board or extender card.
If you suspect a networking problem and the server passes all the system tests,
suspect a network cabling problem that is external to the server.
Problem determination tips
Because of the variety of hardware and software combinations that you can
encounter, use the following information to assist you in problem determination. If
possible, have this information available when you request assistance from IBM.
v Machine type and model
v Microprocessor and hard disk drive upgrades
v Failure symptoms
Does the server fail the diagnostic tests?
What occurs? When? Where?
Does the failure occur on a single server or on multiple servers?
Is the failure repeatable?
Has this configuration ever worked?
What changes, if any, were made before the configuration failed?
Is this the original reported failure?
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Hardware configuration (print screen of the system summary)
v IBM System x Server Firmware level
v Operating-system type and version level
You can solve some problems by comparing the configuration and software setups
between working and nonworking servers. When you compare servers to each
other for diagnostic purposes, consider them identical only if all the following factors
are exactly the same in all the servers:
v Machine type and model
v IBM System x Server Firmware level
v Adapters and attachments, in the same locations
v Address jumpers, terminators, and cabling
v Software versions and levels
v Diagnostic program type and version level
v Configuration option settings
v Operating-system control-file setup
See Appendix A, Getting help and technical assistance, on page 309 for
information about calling IBM for service.
Chapter 3. Diagnostics 125
126 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379
The following replaceable components are available for all models of the System
x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379 server, except as specified otherwise in Replaceable
server components on page 128. For an updated parts listing on the Web,
complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Parts documents lookup.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3400 M3, and click Continue.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 127
Replaceable server components
Replaceable components are of four types:
v Consumable parts: Purchase and replacement of consumable parts
(components, such as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depletable life)
is your responsibility. If IBM acquires or installs a consumable part at your
request, you will be charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty Information document.
Table 9. Parts listing, Type 7378/7379
Index Description
CRU
part number
(Tier 1)
CRU
part number
(Tier 2)
FRU
part number
1 Power supply, fixed 670W 39Y7393
1 Power supply, 920W redundant module
option for x3400 M3
39Y7387
2 Filler, power supply 39Y7391
3 Operator information panel assembly, with
bracket and cables
41Y9083
4 Half-high DVD-ROM drive 44W3254
5 Front bezel assembly 69Y1321
6 EMC shield kit, miscellaneous 69Y1339
7 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap,
146 GB
42D0633
7 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SAS hot swap,
300 GB
42D0638
7 Hard disk drive, 2.5-inch SATA hot swap,
500 GB
42D0753
7 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch SATA hot swap,
500 GB
39M4533
7 Hard disk drive, 3.5-inch, SAS hot swap, 1
TB
42D0778
8 3.5-inch hard disk drive upgrade cage 69Y1335
9 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage 46D1405
10 2.5-inch SAS hard disk drive backplane (8
HDD)
94Y6670
10 2.5-inch SAS hard disk drive backplane (8
HDD)
69Y0650
11 Fan cage assembly 69Y1320
128 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 9. Parts listing, Type 7378/7379 (continued)
Index Description
CRU
part number
(Tier 1)
CRU
part number
(Tier 2)
FRU
part number
12 Hot-swap fan, 120 mm 44E4563
13 Adapter, ServeRAID-M5015 46M0851
14 Adapter, ServeRAID-M5014 46M0918
15 Adapter, ServeRAID-M1015 46M0861
16 Adapter, ServeRAID-BR10il 49Y4737
17 Left-side cover 46D1389
18 Air baffle 46D1409
19 Heat sink 46D1407
20 Microprocessor - 2.00 GHz/4 M 80 W/800
MHZ dual core
69Y0781
20 Microprocessor - 2.13 GHz/4 M 80 W/800
MHZ quad core
46D1270
20 Microprocessor - 2.26 GHz/4 M 80 W/800
MHZ quad core
69Y0782
20 Microprocessor - 2.26 GHz/8 M 80 W/1066
MHZ quad core
81Y5954
20 Microprocessor - 2.40 GHz/12 M 80
W/1066 MHZ quad core
49Y7053
20 Microprocessor - 2.53 GHz/12 M 80
W/1066 MHZ quad core
49Y7052
20 Microprocessor - 2.53 GHz/12 M 80
W/1066 MHZ
81Y5955
20 Microprocessor - 2.66 GHz/12 M 80
W/1066 MHZ quad core
49Y7051
20 Microprocessor - 3.06GHz/12 M 95
W/1333MHz
81Y5958
20 Microprocessor - 2.40 GHz/12 M 80
W/1066MHz six core, Intel Xeon
69Y4714
21 Heat sink retention module 46D1397
22 Memory, 1 GB single rank, UDIMM 44T1572
22 Memory, 1 GB single rank, RDIMM 49Y1442
22 Memory, 2 GB single rank, UDIMM 49Y1421
22 Memory, 2 GB dual rank, RDIMM 49Y1443
22 Memory, 4 GB dual rank, RDIMM 49Y1445
23 System board 81Y6003
24 VRM 43X3307
25 Power-supply cage assembly, 920W 39Y7389
Air Duct 46D1409
Alcohol wipe 59P4739
Backplane, 3.5-inch SAS (4 HDD) 49Y4462
Backplate and cable assembly (for
3.5-inch HDDs)
46D1398
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379 129
Table 9. Parts listing, Type 7378/7379 (continued)
Index Description
CRU
part number
(Tier 1)
CRU
part number
(Tier 2)
FRU
part number
Battery, 3.0 volt 33F8354
Bezel, rack assembly (option) 69Y1333
Cable assembly (simple-swap) 49Y4514
Cable, operator information panel 41Y9082
Cable, backplane configuration (2.5-inch
HDD)
69Y1331
Cable, backplane configuration (3.5-inch
HDD)
46D1401
Cable, Backplane Power (2.5-inch HDD) 69Y1326
Cable, Backplane Power (3.5-inch HDD) 69Y1325
Cable, DVD(optical) Signal, SATA 69Y1330
Cable, Fan Cage 46D1394
Cable, Front USB 26K6096
Cable, Optical Power, SATA 69Y1327
Cable, SAS Signal (2.5-inch HDD) 69Y1328
Cable, SAS Signal (3.5-inch HDD) 69Y1329
Cable, SAS Signal (RAID Adapter to
ServeRAID expansion Adapter)
69Y1332
Cable, Tape Drive Power Converter 49Y6796
EMC shield kit, optional rack model 41Y9070
EMC shield kit, miscellaneous 69Y1339
EMC shield, 4 x 3.5-inch 46D1402
EMC plate kit, simple-swap 46D1399
Extender card, PCI Express 49Y4508
Extender card, PCI-X 49Y4509
Filler, fan 69Y1324
Foot kit, stabilizer, front 26K7345
Foot kit, rear 13N2985
Keyboard, US 42C0060
Keyboard, Korea 42C0082
Keyboard, Japan 42C0081
Keylock assembly 26K7363
Mouse, USB optical 39Y9875
Multiburner, SATA 43W8467
Planar tray 46D1390
Random lock assembly 26K7364
ServeRAID advance feature key (for
M5014)
46M0931
Slide assembly, optional rack model 40K6679
System service label 69Y1336
130 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Table 9. Parts listing, Type 7378/7379 (continued)
Index Description
CRU
part number
(Tier 1)
CRU
part number
(Tier 2)
FRU
part number
Thermal grease 41Y9292
Top/side Cover 46D1411
Virtual media key assembly 46C7532
Consumable parts are not covered by the IBM Statement of Limited Warranty. The
following consumable parts are available for purchase from the retail store.
Table 10. Consumable parts, Type 7378/7379
Index Description Part number
ServeRAID battery 43W4342
To order a consumable part, complete the following steps:
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/.
2. From the Products menu, select Upgrades, accessories & parts.
3. Click Obtain maintenance parts; then, follow the instructions to order the part
from the retail store.
If you need help with your order, call the toll-free number that is listed on the retail
parts page, or contact your local IBM representative for assistance.
Power cords
For your safety, IBM provides a power cord with a grounded attachment plug to use
with this IBM product. To avoid electrical shock, always use the power cord and
plug with a properly grounded outlet.
IBM power cords used in the United States and Canada are listed by Underwriter's
Laboratories (UL) and certified by the Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
For units intended to be operated at 115 volts: Use a UL-listed and CSA-certified
cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT, three-conductor cord,
a maximum of 15 feet in length and a parallel blade, grounding-type attachment
plug rated 15 amperes, 125 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (U.S. use): Use a UL-listed and
CSA-certified cord set consisting of a minimum 18 AWG, Type SVT or SJT,
three-conductor cord, a maximum of 15 feet in length and a tandem blade,
grounding-type attachment plug rated 15 amperes, 250 volts.
For units intended to be operated at 230 volts (outside the U.S.): Use a cord set
with a grounding-type attachment plug. The cord set should have the appropriate
safety approvals for the country in which the equipment will be installed.
IBM power cords for a specific country or region are usually available only in that
country or region.
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379 131
IBM power cord part
number Used in these countries and regions
39M5206 China
39M5102 Australia, Fiji, Kiribati, Nauru, New Zealand, Papua New Guinea
39M5123 Afghanistan, Albania, Algeria, Andorra, Angola, Armenia, Austria,
Azerbaijan, Belarus, Belgium, Benin, Bosnia and Herzegovina,
Bulgaria, Burkina Faso, Burundi, Cambodia, Cameroon, Cape
Verde, Central African Republic, Chad, Comoros, Congo
(Democratic Republic of), Congo (Republic of), Cote DIvoire
(Ivory Coast), Croatia (Republic of), Czech Republic, Dahomey,
Djibouti, Egypt, Equatorial Guinea, Eritrea, Estonia, Ethiopia,
Finland, France, French Guyana, French Polynesia, Germany,
Greece, Guadeloupe, Guinea, Guinea Bissau, Hungary, Iceland,
Indonesia, Iran, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Laos (Peoples
Democratic Republic of), Latvia, Lebanon, Lithuania, Luxembourg,
Macedonia (former Yugoslav Republic of), Madagascar, Mali,
Martinique, Mauritania, Mauritius, Mayotte, Moldova (Republic of),
Monaco, Mongolia, Morocco, Mozambique, Netherlands, New
Caledonia, Niger, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Reunion, Romania,
Russian Federation, Rwanda, Sao Tome and Principe, Saudi
Arabia, Senegal, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia (Republic of),
Somalia, Spain, Suriname, Sweden, Syrian Arab Republic,
Tajikistan, Tahiti, Togo, Tunisia, Turkey, Turkmenistan, Ukraine,
Upper Volta, Uzbekistan, Vanuatu, Vietnam, Wallis and Futuna,
Yugoslavia (Federal Republic of), Zaire
39M5130 Denmark
39M5144 Bangladesh, Lesotho, Macao, Maldives, Namibia, Nepal,
Pakistan, Samoa, South Africa, Sri Lanka, Swaziland, Uganda
39M5151 Abu Dhabi, Bahrain, Botswana, Brunei Darussalam, Channel
Islands, China (Hong Kong S.A.R.), Cyprus, Dominica, Gambia,
Ghana, Grenada, Iraq, Ireland, Jordan, Kenya, Kuwait, Liberia,
Malawi, Malaysia, Malta, Myanmar (Burma), Nigeria, Oman,
Polynesia, Qatar, Saint Kitts and Nevis, Saint Lucia, Saint Vincent
and the Grenadines, Seychelles, Sierra Leone, Singapore, Sudan,
Tanzania (United Republic of), Trinidad and Tobago, United Arab
Emirates (Dubai), United Kingdom, Yemen, Zambia, Zimbabwe
39M5158 Liechtenstein, Switzerland
39M5165 Chile, Italy, Libyan Arab Jamahiriya
39M5172 Israel
39M5095 220 - 240 V
Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda, Bolivia, Brazil, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman
Islands, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic,
Ecuador, El Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras,
Jamaica, Japan, Mexico, Micronesia (Federal States of),
Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua, Panama, Peru, Philippines,
Taiwan, United States of America, Venezuela
39M5512 110 - 120 V
Antigua and Barbuda, Aruba, Bahamas, Barbados, Belize,
Bermuda, Bolivia, Caicos Islands, Canada, Cayman Islands,
Colombia, Costa Rica, Cuba, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El
Salvador, Guam, Guatemala, Haiti, Honduras, Jamaica, Mexico,
Micronesia (Federal States of), Netherlands Antilles, Nicaragua,
Panama, Peru, Philippines, Saudi Arabia, Thailand, Taiwan,
United States of America, Venezuela
132 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
IBM power cord part
number Used in these countries and regions
39M5219 Korea (Democratic Peoples Republic of), Korea (Republic of)
39M5199 Japan
39M5068 Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
39M5226 India
39M5233 Brazil
Chapter 4. Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379 133
134 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components
Replaceable components are of four types:
v Consumable parts: Purchase and replacement of consumable parts
(components, such as batteries and printer cartridges, that have depletable life)
is your responsibility. If IBM acquires or installs a consumable part at your
request, you will be charged for the service.
v Tier 1 customer replaceable unit (CRU): Replacement of Tier 1 CRUs is your
responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your request, you will be charged for
the installation.
v Tier 2 customer replaceable unit: You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or
request IBM to install it, at no additional charge, under the type of warranty
service that is designated for your server.
v Field replaceable unit (FRU): FRUs must be installed only by trained service
technicians.
See Chapter 4, Parts listing, System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379, on page 127 to
determine whether a component is a Tier 1 CRU, Tier 2 CRU, or FRU.
For information about the terms of the warranty and getting service and assistance,
see the Warranty Information document.
Installation guidelines
Before you install optional devices, read the following information:
v Read the safety information that begins on page vii and the guidelines in
Handling static-sensitive devices on page 137. This information will help you
work safely.
v Observe good housekeeping in the area where you are working. Place removed
covers and other parts in a safe place.
v If you must start the server while the cover is removed, make sure that no one is
near the server and that no tools or other objects have been left inside the
server.
v Do not attempt to lift an object that you think is too heavy for you. If you have to
lift a heavy object, observe the following precautions:
Make sure that you can stand safely without slipping.
Distribute the weight of the object equally between your feet.
Use a slow lifting force. Never move suddenly or twist when you lift a heavy
object.
To avoid straining the muscles in your back, lift by standing or by pushing up
with your leg muscles.
v Make sure that you have an adequate number of properly grounded electrical
outlets for the server, monitor, and other devices.
v Back up all important data before you make changes to disk drives.
v Have a small flat-blade screwdriver available.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install or replace hot-swap power
supplies, hot-swap fans, or hot-plug Universal Serial Bus (USB) devices.
v Blue on a component indicates touch points, where you can grip the component
to remove it from or install it in the server, open or close a latch, and so on.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 135
v Orange on a component or an orange label on or near a component indicates
that the component can be hot-swapped, which means that if the server and
operating system support hot-swap capability, you can remove or install the
component while the server is running. (Orange can also indicate touch points on
hot-swap components.) See the instructions for removing or installing a specific
hot-swap component for any additional procedures that you might have to
perform before you remove or install the component.
v When you are finished working on the server, reinstall all safety shields, guards,
labels, and ground wires.
v You can install a maximum of two IDE devices in the server.
v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
System reliability guidelines
To help ensure proper cooling and system reliability, make sure that the following
requirements are next:
v Each of the drive bays has a drive or a filler panel and electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) shield installed in it.
v If the server has redundant power, each of the power-supply bays has a power
supply installed in it.
v There is adequate space around the server to allow the server cooling system to
work properly. Leave approximately 50 mm (2.0 in.) of open space around the
front and rear of the server. Do not place objects in front of the fans. For proper
cooling and airflow, replace the server cover before you turn on the server.
Operating the server for extended periods of time (more than 30 minutes) with
the server cover removed might damage server components.
v You have followed the cabling instructions that come with optional adapters.
v You have replaced a failed fan as soon as possible.
v You have replaced a hot-swap drive within 2 minutes of removal.
v You do not remove the air baffles or air ducts while the server is running.
Operating the server without the air baffle or air ducts might cause the
microprocessor to overheat.
v Microprocessor socket 2 always contains either a microprocessor baffle or a
microprocessor and heat sink.
Working inside the server with the power on
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when you work inside the server with the
power on.
The server supports hot-plug, hot-add, and hot-swap devices and is designed to
operate safely while it is turned on and the cover is removed. Follow these
guidelines when you work inside a server that is turned on:
v Avoid wearing loose-fitting clothing on your forearms. Button long-sleeved shirts
before you work inside the server; do not wear cuff links while you are you work
inside the server.
v Do not allow your necktie or scarf to hang inside the server.
v Remove jewelry, such as bracelets, necklaces, rings, and loose-fitting wrist
watches.
136 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v Remove items from your shirt pocket, such as pens and pencils, that might fall
into the server as you lean over it.
v Avoid dropping any metallic objects, such as paper clips, hairpins, and screws,
into the server.
Handling static-sensitive devices
Attention: Static electricity can damage the server and other electronic devices.
To avoid damage, keep static-sensitive devices in their static-protective packages
until you are ready to install them.
To reduce the possibility of damage from electrostatic discharge, observe the
following precautions:
v Limit your movement. Movement can cause static electricity to build up around
you.
v The use of a grounding system is recommended. For example, wear an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap, if one is available. Always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
v Handle the device carefully, holding it by its edges or its frame.
v Do not touch solder joints, pins, or exposed circuitry.
v Do not leave the device where others can handle and damage it.
v While the device is still in its static-protective package, touch it to an unpainted
metal part on the outside of the server for at least 2 seconds. This drains static
electricity from the package and from your body.
v Remove the device from its package and install it directly into the server without
setting down the device. If it is necessary to set down the device, put it back into
its static-protective package. Do not place the device on the server cover or on a
metal surface.
v Take additional care when you handle devices during cold weather. Heating
reduces indoor humidity and increases static electricity.
Returning a device or component
If you are instructed to return a device or component, follow the packaging
instructions provided with the replacement part. Use any packaging materials for
shipping that are supplied to you.
Opening the bezel media door
To open the media door, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices.
2. Unlock the left-side cover.
Note: You must unlock the left-side cover to open or remove the bezel. When
you lock the left-side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.
3. Check the status of the media door icon. If the icon on the side of the bezel is
in the unlocked position, open the bezel media door directly.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 137
Media door icon
4. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
5. From inside of the top section of the bezel door, slide the blue tab up to unlock
the bezel media door; then, grasp the depressed area on the media door and
pull the door open.
138 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
6. When the media door is unlocked, the icon on the side of the bezel will be in
the unlocked position.
Media door icon
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 139
Closing the bezel media door
To close the media door, complete the following steps:
1. Swing the bezel media door closed and push it into the bezel to close it.
2. From inside of the top section of the bezel door, slide the blue tab down to lock
the bezel media door.
3. Close the bezel.
Opening the power-supply cage
Opening the power-supply cage allows access to the air baffle, microprocessors,
and DIMMs. To open the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii, and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies and power-supply fillers,
if any are installed (see Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
140 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Pull up on the power-supply cage handle to unlock the cage; then, rotate the
cage out until it stops. The tab on the rear power-supply latch bracket clicks into
place when the cage is completely out of the way.
6. Let the power-supply cage rest on the rear power-supply latch bracket.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 141
Closing the power-supply cage
To return the power-supply cage to its closed position, complete the following steps:
1. Rotate the power-supply cage slightly toward the rear side; then, push down on
the release tab on the rear power-supply support bracket.
Power supply
support bracket
Power supply
release tab
2. Rotate the power-supply cage into the server chassis. The locating tabs on the
power-supply cage must fit over the corresponding tabs on the front latch
bracket.
Attention: Do not allow the power-supply cage cables to be caught or
pinched while you rotate the power-supply cage into the chassis.
142 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Power-supply
cage handle
Power-supply cage
Power-supply cage
front latch bracket
Locating tabs
Locating tabs
Notch
3. Rotate the power-supply cage handle down until the handle tip engages the
notch in the front latch bracket; then, lower the handle until it locks in place.
4. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
5. Install the hot-swap power supplies or power-supply filler (see Installing a
hot-swap power supply on page 259).
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing a ServeRAID adapter battery
If a ServeRAID adapter has a battery on it and you need to replace it, complete the
following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
3. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
4. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
6. Remove the ServeRAID adapter with battery from the PCI slot (see Removing
an adapter on page 199).
7. Remove the screws that hold the battery from the ServeRAID adapter (see the
following illustration for the location of the screws). Save the screws for future
use.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 143
8. Lift the battery and the battery carrier away from the ServeRAID adapter.
If you are instructed to return the ServeRAID adapter battery, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Installing a ServeRAID adapter battery
To install the RAID adapter battery in the server, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
3. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
4. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
144 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
5. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
6. Align the holes in the edge of the battery carrier and the adapter battery with
the holes on the ServeRAID adapter.
7. Insert the screws to secure the ServeRAID adapter battery in place.
8. Install the ServeRAID adapter on the system board (see Installing an adapter
on page 200).
9. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Note: You must wait approximately 3 minutes after you connect the server
power cord to an electrical outlet before the power-control button becomes
active.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 145
Removing the battery
To remove the battery, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices.
3. Disconnect all external cables and power cords.
4. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
6. Remove the battery:
a. Use one finger to tilt the battery horizontally out of its socket, pushing it
away from the socket.
b. Lift and remove the battery from the socket.
7. Dispose of the battery as required by local ordinances or regulations (see the
Environmental Notices and User Guide for more information).
146 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the battery
The following notes describe information that you must consider when you replace
the battery in the server:
v You must replace the battery with a lithium battery of the same type from the
same manufacturer.
v To order replacement batteries, call 1-800-426-7378 within the United States, and
1-800-465-7999 or 1-800-465-6666 within Canada. Outside the U.S. and
Canada, call your IBM marketing representative or authorized reseller.
v After you replace the battery, you must reconfigure the server and reset the
system date and time.
v To avoid possible danger, read and follow the following safety statement.
Statement 2:
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 147
CAUTION:
When replacing the lithium battery, use only IBM Part Number 33F8354 or an
equivalent type battery recommended by the manufacturer. If your system has
a module containing a lithium battery, replace it only with the same module
type made by the same manufacturer. The battery contains lithium and can
explode if not properly used, handled, or disposed of.
Do not:
v Throw or immerse into water
v Heat to more than 100C (212F)
v Repair or disassemble
To install the replacement battery, complete the following steps:
1. Follow any special handling and installation instructions that come with the
replacement battery.
2. Insert the replacement battery:
a. Hold the battery in a vertical orientation so that the smaller side is facing the
socket.
b. Tilt the battery and slide the battery into its socket; then, press the battery
toward the socket until it clicks into place. Make sure that the battery clip
holds the battery securely.
3. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
4. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Note: You must wait approximately 3 minutes after you connect the server
power cord to an electrical outlet before the power-control button becomes
active.
5. Start the Setup utility and reset the configuration:
v Set the system date and time.
v Set the power-on password.
v Reconfigure the server.
See Starting the Setup utility on page 287 for details.
148 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Internal cable routing and connectors
The server uses cables to connect SATA attached, simple-swap SATA, hot-swap
SATA, hot-swap SAS and DVD drive devices to the power supply and to the system
board.
Review the following information before connecting power and signal cables to
internal drives:
v The drives that are preinstalled in the server come with power and signal cables
attached. If you replace any drives, remember which cable is attached to which
drive.
v When you route a cable, make sure that it does not block the airflow to the rear
of the drives or over the microprocessor or DIMMs.
Tape drive cable connection
You can install either a USB or SATA tape drive in the server. The following
illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors for both the USB tape
drive and the SATA tape drive. It also shows the internal power cable for the optical
drives.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 149
The following illustrations show the cabling information for installing the SATA to
traditional power converter cable when you install an RDX internal USB tape drive
in the server. This cable comes with the server in the plastic bag with the drive rails.
Connects to
tape drive
Connects to
optical power cable
Power
converter
cable
150 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Power converter
cable
Optical power cable
SATA connector
Tape drive
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 151
DVD drive cable connection
The following illustration shows the internal SATA and power cable routing and the
connectors from the DVD drive to the system board.
The following illustration shows the internal power cable routing and the connectors
from the UltraSlim DVD drive to the system board.
152 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following illustration shows the internal SATA cable routing and the connectors
from the UltraSlim DVD drive to the system board.
Operator information panel cable connection
The following illustration shows the internal cable routing and connectors from the
operator information panel to the system board.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 153
154 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Hard disk drive cable connection
Review the following information before connecting power and signal cables to
internal drives:
1. The following illustrations show the connectors on the 2.5-inch and
3.5-inch hard disk drive backplanes.
Figure 3. Connectors on the 3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane
Figure 4. Connectors on the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 155
2. The following illustrations show the cable connectors on ServeRAID
M1015/M5014/M5015.
Note:
v For proper cooling, do not install any card in the slot next in sequence to a
ServeRAID adapter with battery backup module (for example, if a ServeRAID
adapter with battery backup module is installed in slot 2, do not install any
card in slot 3).
Figure 5. Cable connectors on ServeRAID-M1015 adapter
Figure 6. Cable connectors on ServeRAID-M5014 adapter
156 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID adapter,
you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you install drives. See
the ServeRAID adapter documentation for additional information about RAID
operation and complete instructions for using the ServeRAID adapter.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 157
Review the following information before connecting power, configuration, and signal
cables for the drives:
1. For server models with four 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives.
v The following illustration shows the internal power cable routing.
v The following illustration shows the internal configuration cable routing.
v The following illustration shows the internal signal cable routing for installing a
ServeRAID adapter.
158 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 159
2. For server models with eight 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives.
v The following illustration shows the internal power cable routing.
v The following illustration shows the internal configuration cable routing.
v The following illustration shows the internal signal cable routing for installing a
ServeRAID adapter.
160 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 161
3. For server models with eight 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives.
v The following illustration shows the internal power cable routing.
v The following illustration shows the internal configuration cable routing.
v The following illustration shows the internal signal cable routing for installing a
ServeRAID adapter.
162 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 163
4. For server models with sixteen 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drives.
v The following illustration shows the internal power cable routing.
v The following illustration shows the internal configuration cable routing.
164 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v The following illustration shows the internal signal cable routing for installing a
ServeRAID adapter and a ServeRAID expansion adapter.
Note: SAS expander card does not support 3 GB RAID adapters.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 165
Removing and replacing Tier 1 CRUs
Installation of Tier 1 CRUs is your responsibility. If IBM installs a Tier 1 CRU at your
request, you will be charged for the installation.
Removing the left-side cover
To remove the left-side cover complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. If you are installing or replacing a non-hot-swap component, turn off the server
and all peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and all external
cables.
3. Unlock the left-side cover, using the key that comes with the server.
4. Pull the cover-release latch down while you rotate the top edge of the cover
away from the server; then, lift the cover off the server.
Attention: For proper cooling and airflow, replace the cover before you turn
on the server. Operating the server for more than 2 minutes with the cover
removed might damage server components.
Installing the left-side cover
166 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
To install the left-side cover, complete the following steps:
1. Set the bottom edge of the left-side cover on the bottom ledge of the server.
2. Rotate the top edge of the cover toward the server and press inward on the
cover until it clicks into place.
3. Lock the cover, using the key that comes with the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 167
Removing and installing drives
Depending on the server model, the server might come with a SATA attached
DVD-ROM drive in bay 1.
The following are illustrations of the server and the location of the drive bays. Your
hardware might differ, depending on the model.
Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation using a ServeRAID adapter,
you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you install drives. See the
ServeRAID adapter documentation for additional information about RAID operation
and complete instructions for using the ServeRAID adapter.
The following illustrations show the location of the drive bays in the 2.5-inch
hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA hard disk drive server models.
Figure 7. server with eight 2.5-inch hard disk drives
168 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
The following illustrations show the location of the drive bays in the 3.5-inch
hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA hard disk drive server models.
Figure 8. server with sixteen 2.5-inch hard disk drives
Figure 9. server with four 3.5-inch hard disk drives
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 169
The following notes describe the types of drives that the server supports and other
information that you must consider when installing a drive:
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that is specified in
the documentation that comes with the drive.
v Check the instructions that come with the drive to see whether you have to set
any switches or jumpers on the drive. If you are installing a SAS or SATA device,
be sure to set the SAS or SATA ID for that device.
v Optional external tape drives and DVD-ROM drives are examples of
removable-media drives. You can install removable-media drives only in bays 1,
2, and 3 on models with four 3.5-inch, eight or sixteen 2.5-inch hard disk drives.
v To install a 3.5-in drive in a 5.25-in bay, you must use a 5.25-in conversion kit.
v The electromagnetic interference (EMI) integrity and cooling of the server are
protected by having all bays and PCI slots covered or occupied. When you install
a drive or PCI adapter, save the EMC shield and filler panel from the bay or the
PCI adapter slot cover in the event that you later remove the drive or adapter.
v For a complete list of supported options for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
Figure 10. server with eight 3.5-inch hard disk drives
170 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive
To remove a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Unlock the left-side cover.
Note: You must unlock the left-side cover to open or remove the bezel. When
you lock the left-side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.
3. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 171
4. Press down on the release latch to open the drive handle; then, pull the drive
out of the drive bay.
5. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap hard disk drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
172 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive
The following notes describe the types of hard disk drives that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a hard disk drive:
v Depending on the model, the server supports up to eight 3.5-inch or up to
sixteen 2.5-inch SAS hot-swap hard disk drives in the hot-swap bays.
Note: SAS expander card does not support 3 GB RAID adapters.
v For a list of supported optional devices for the server, see http://www.ibm.com/
servers/eserver/serverproven/compat/us/.
v Inspect the drive and drive bay for signs of damage.
v Make sure that the drive is correctly installed in the drive bay.
v See the documentation for the ServeRAID adapter for instructions for installing a
hard disk drive.
Note: For proper cooling, do not install any card in the slot next in sequence to
a ServeRAID adapter with battery backup module (for example, if a ServeRAID
adapter with battery backup module is installed in slot 2, do not install any card
in slot 3).
v All hot-swap drives in the server must have the same throughput speed rating;
using drives with different speed ratings might cause all drives to operate at the
speed of the slowest drive.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap
drive bays. However, you must turn off the server when you perform any steps
that involve installing or removing cables.
v The drive ID of each hot-swap hard disk drive is printed above the drive bay.
To install a hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 173
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the disk drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the disk drive from the package.
3. Remove the filler panel from the hot-swap drive bay, if one is installed.
4. Make sure that the tray handle is open; then, install the hard disk drive into the
hot-swap bay.
5. Rotate the drive handle down until the drive is seated in the hot-swap bay and
the release latch clicks into place.
Notes:
a. After you install the hard disk drive, check the disk drive status LEDs to
verify that the hard disk drive is operating correctly.
If the amber hard disk drive status LED is lit continuously, that drive is faulty
and must be replaced. If the green hard disk drive activity LED is flashing,
the drive is being accessed.
b. If the server is configured for RAID operation through an optional
ServeRAID adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you
install hard disk drives. See the ServeRAID documentation on the IBM
ServeRAID Support CD for additional information about RAID operation and
complete instructions for using ServeRAID Manager.
6. Close the bezel.
174 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive
Attention: To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more
than 10 minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.
To remove a 3.5-inch hot-swap SAS or hot-swap SATA hard disk drive, complete
the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Unlock the left-side cover.
Note: You must unlock the left-side cover to open or remove the bezel. When
you lock the left-side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.
3. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
4. Rotate the drive tray handle of the drive assembly to the open position.
5. Grasp the handle of the drive and pull the drive out of the bay.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 175
6. If you are instructed to return the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
176 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive
Before installing a 3.5inch hot-swap hard disk drive, read the following information:
v Inspect the drive tray for signs of damage.
v To maintain proper system cooling, do not operate the server for more than 10
minutes without either a drive or a filler panel installed in each drive bay.
v You do not have to turn off the server to install hot-swap drives in the hot-swap
drive bays.
To install a 3.5inch hot-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.
1. Remove the EMC shield, if one is present.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.
3. Make sure that the drive tray handle is in the open position.
4. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay; then, carefully slide the
drive assembly into the drive bay until the drive snaps into place.
5. Rotate the drive tray handle to the closed position.
6. Check the hard disk drive status indicator to make sure that the hard disk drive
is operating correctly.
After you replace a failed hard disk drive, the green activity LED flashes as the
disk spins up. The amber LED turns off after approximately 1 minute. If the new
drive starts to rebuild, the amber LED flashes slowly, and the green activity LED
remains lit during the rebuild process. If the amber LED remains lit, see Hard
disk drive problems on page 64.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 177
Note: You might have to reconfigure the disk arrays after you install hard disk
drives. See the RAID documentation on the IBM Web site at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ for information about RAID adapters.
7. Close the bezel.
8. Lock the left-side cover.
178 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a simple-swap hard disk drive
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all
power from the server before removing or installing a simple-swap hard disk drive.
To remove a simple-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock the left-side cover.
Note: You must unlock the left-side cover to open or remove the bezel. When
you lock the left-side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.
4. Open the bezel.
5. Grasp the tab on the drive bay EMC shield and rotate it to the open position.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 179
6. Pull the loops of the drive assembly that is to be removed toward each other;
then, pull the drive assembly out of the bay and set it aside.
7. If you are instructed to return the simple-swap hard disk drive, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
180 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a simple-swap hard disk drive
Attention: Simple-swap hard disk drives are not hot-swappable. Disconnect all
power from the server before removing or installing a simple-swap hard disk drive.
To install a simple-swap hard disk drive, complete the following steps.
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the drive to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive from the package and place
it on a static-protective surface.
2. Align the drive assembly with the guide rails in the bay.
3. Pull the loops of the drive assembly toward each other; then, carefully slide the
drive assembly into the drive bay until it stops and release the loops.
Note: Do not release the loops on the drive assembly until it is completely
seated.
4. Close the drive bay EMC shield.
5. Close the bezel.
6. Lock the left-side cover.
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 181
Removing a hot-swap fan
The server comes with three 120 mm x 38 mm hot-swap fans in the fan-support
bracket at the front of the server. The following instructions can be used to remove
any hot-swap fan in the server.
Hot-swap fan
To remove a hot-swap fan, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
Attention: To ensure proper system cooling, do not leave the top cover off the
server for more than 2 minutes.
3. Open the fan-locking handle by sliding the orange release latch in the direction
of the arrow.
4. Pull outward on the free end of the handle to remove the fan from the server.
5. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap fan, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Installing a hot-swap fan
The server comes with three 120 mm x 38 mm hot-swap fans in the fan support
bracket at the front of the server. The following instructions can be used to install
any hot-swap fan in the server.
182 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Hot-swap fan
Fan air
baffle
To install a hot-swap fan, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hot-swap fan to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the fan from the package.
3. Open the fan-locking handle on the replacement fan.
4. Insert the fan into the socket and close the handle to the locked position.
5. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 183
Removing a DVD drive
1. To remove the DVD drive on models with four 3.5-inch, eight 3.5-inch,
eight 2.5-ich or sixteen 2.5-inch hard disk drives, complete the following
steps:
a. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
b. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
c. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover
on page 166).
d. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and
rotate the left side of the bezel away from the server.
e. Disconnect the DVD drive cables from the back of the DVD drive.
f. Grasp the blue tabs on each side of the DVD drive and press them inward
while you pull the drive out of the server.
184 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
g. Remove the blue rails from the DVD drive and save them for future use.
h. If you are instructed to return the DVD drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied
to you.
2. To remove the UltraSlim DVD drive on models with eight 3.5-inch hard
disk drives, complete the following steps:
a. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
b. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
c. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover
on page 166).
d. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and
rotate the left side of the bezel away from the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 185
e. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.
f. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
g. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
h. Disconnect the UltraSlim DVD drive cables from the system board and clips.
186 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
i. Store the cables for future use.
j. Unscrew and remove the 3.5-inch disk drive cage.
k. Press and hold the release tab down as you push the UltraSlim DVD drive
from the rear to slide it out from the bay.
l. Slide the drive-retention clip from the side of the drive. Save the clip to use
when you install the replacement drive or replace the UltraSlim DVD drive
filler.
m. If you are instructed to return the UltraSlim DVD drive, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied
to you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 187
Installing a DVD drive
1. To install the DVD drive on models with four 3.5-inch, eight 3.5-inch, eight
2.5-ich or sixteen 2.5-inch hard disk drives, complete the following steps:
a. If you are replacing a drive, make sure that:
v You have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in the
documentation that comes with the new drive.
v You have checked the instructions that come with the new drive to
determine whether you must set any switches or jumpers in the drive.
v You have removed the blue optical drive rails from the side of the old
drive and have them available for installation on the new drive.
Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the
following safety precaution.
Statement 3:
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic
devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product
could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no
serviceable parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B
laser diode. Note the following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the
beam.
Class 1 Laser Product
Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1
`
b. Touch the static-protective package that contains the DVD drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the DVD drive from the
package.
188 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
c. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
d. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
e. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover
on page 166).
f. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
g. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and
rotate the left side of the bezel away from the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 189
h. Install the blue rails on the DVD drive, using the holes nearest the center of
the drive.
i. Follow the instructions that come with the drive to set jumpers or switches, if
there are any.
Note: You might find it easier to install the new drive from the front and then
attach the cables.
j. Align the rails on the DVD drive with the guides in the drive bay; then, slide
the DVD drive into the drive bay until the rails click into place.
190 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
k. Connect power and signal cables to the drive and the connectors on the
system board. (See Internal cable routing and connectors on page 149 for
more information.)
l. Reinstall the air baffle.
m. Reinstall the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on
page 229.)
n. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly
into the chassis.
o. Close the bezel.
p. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on
page 166).
q. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
2. To install the UltraSlim DVD drive on models with four 3.5-inch, complete
the following steps:
v Locate the documentation that comes with the drive and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this chapter.
v Make sure that you have all the cables and other equipment that are
specified in the documentation that comes with the drive.
v The server supports one ultra-slim SATA optical drive.
a. If you are replacing a drive, make sure that:
v You have all the cables and other equipment that are specified in the
documentation that comes with the new drive.
v You have checked the instructions that come with the new drive to
determine whether you must set any switches or jumpers in the drive.
v You have removed the blue optical drive rails from the side of the old
drive and have them available for installation on the new drive.
Note: If you are installing a drive that contains a laser, observe the
following safety precaution.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 191
Statement 3:
CAUTION:
When laser products (such as CD-ROMs, DVD drives, fiber optic
devices, or transmitters) are installed, note the following:
v Do not remove the covers. Removing the covers of the laser product
could result in exposure to hazardous laser radiation. There are no
serviceable parts inside the device.
v Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein might result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
DANGER
Some laser products contain an embedded Class 3A or Class 3B
laser diode. Note the following.
Laser radiation when open. Do not stare into the beam, do not view
directly with optical instruments, and avoid direct exposure to the
beam.
Class 1 Laser Product
Laser Klasse 1
Laser Klass 1
Luokan 1 Laserlaite
Appareil A Laser de Classe 1
`
b. Touch the static-protective package that contains the UltraSlim DVD drive to
any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the UltraSlim DVD
drive from the package.
c. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
d. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
e. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover
on page 166).
f. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and
rotate the left side of the bezel away from the server.
192 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
g. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.
h. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
i. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 193
j. Disconnect the power and signal cables of the DVD drive from the system
board.
k. Pull the power and signal cables of the UltraSlim DVD drive through the
slim slot on top of the 3.5-inch hard disk drive cage.
l. Connect the power and signal cables to the UltraSlim DVD drive. (See
Internal cable routing and connectors on page 149 for more information.)
m. Attach the drive retention clip to the side of the new drive.
194 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
n. Slide the UltraSlim DVD drive into the slim slot on top of the 3.5-inch disk
drive cage until the drive clicks into place. (For more information, see
Installing the upper 3.5-inch disk drive cage on page 255.)
Note: Pull the power and signal cables of the UltraSlim DVD drive into the
slim slot on top of the cage first. Make sure the cables are not stuck when
you slide the UltraSlim DVD drive into the cage.
o. Slide the 3.5-inch disk drive cage into the upper opening of the server along
the lower edge of the opening.
Note: Pull the power and signal cables of the UltraSlim DVD drive into the
upper opening of the server first. Make sure the cables are not stuck when
you slide the disk drive cage into the server.
p. Secure the 3.5-inch disk drive cage with the screws.
q. Reconnect the power and signal cables of the UltraSlim DVD drive to the
system board. (See Internal cable routing and connectors on page 149 for
more information.)
r. Reinstall the air baffle.
s. Reinstall the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on
page 229.)
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 195
t. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly
into the chassis.
u. Close the bezel.
v. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on
page 166).
w. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
196 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the air baffle
To remove the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii, and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle:
a. Lift the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle up as shown in the illustration.
b. Press the air baffle pinch tab.
c. Lift the air baffle up and remove it from the server.
8. If you are instructed to return the air baffle, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 197
Installing the air baffle
To install the air baffle, complete the following steps:
1. With the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle lifted up, align the positioning pins on
the ends of the air baffle with the locating holes in the server chassis and fan
cage assembly.
2. Slide the air baffle down into the server until the positioning pins fit into the
locating holes; then, press down on the air baffle until the pinch tab clicks into
place.
3. Rotate the rear (hinged) part of the air baffle down to the system board.
Note: Make sure that the power-supply cage cables are not caught under the
air baffle.
4. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
5. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap
power supply on page 259).
6. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
198 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing an adapter
To remove an adapter, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Rotate the adapter-retention brackets to the open position.
6. Disconnect the cables from the adapter.
7. Remove the screw that secures the adapter to the server chassis.
8. Pull the adapter out of the adapter connector; then, lift the adapter out of the
server.
9. If you are instructed to return the adapter, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 199
Installing an adapter
The following notes describe the types of adapters that the server supports and
other information that you must consider when you install an adapter:
v Locate the documentation that comes with the adapter and follow those
instructions in addition to the instructions in this section. If you must change the
switch or jumper settings on the adapter, follow the instructions that come with
the adapter.
v Avoid touching the components and gold-edge connectors on the adapter.
v PCI slots 1 and 6 support half-length PCI adapters only.
v PCI slots 2, 3, 4, and 5 support both full-height and full-length PCI adapters.
v The PCI Express extender card supports a full-length adapter.
v The PCI-X extender card supports two full-length adapters.
v PCI slots 1 and 5 support the RAID adapters.
v PCI slot 2 supports a VGA adapter.
v The PCI configuration:
Slot 1 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x8 links, PCI Express 1.0a compliant.
Slot 2 is a PCI Express x16 slot with x8 links, PCI Express 1.0a compliant.
Slots 3 and 4 are PCI Express x8 slots with x4 links, PCI Express 1.0a
compliant.
Slot 5 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x8 links, PCI Express 1.0a compliant
Slot 6 is a PCI 33/32 slot, PCI 2.2 compliant.
PCI Express extender card slot 7 is a PCI Express x8 slot with x4 links, PCI
Express 1.0a compliant.
PCI-X extender card slots 7 and 8 are PCI-X slots with 64/32 bits, 133/100/66
MHz from PXH.
v The system scans PCI slots 1 through 6 to assign system resources. The system
then starts (boots) the system devices in the following order, if you have not
changed the default boot precedence: integrated Ethernet controller, ServeRAID
adapter, and then PCI, PCI-X, and PCI Express slots.
Note: To change the boot precedence for PCI and PCI-X devices, start the
Setup utility and select Start Options from the main menu. See Starting the
Setup utility on page 287 for details about using the Setup utility.
v The server uses a rotational interrupt technique to configure PCI adapters so that
you can install PCI adapters that do not support sharing of PCI interrupts.
200 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components when
the server is powered-on might cause the server to stop, which might result in the
loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an electrostatic-discharge
wrist strap or other grounding system when working inside the server with the
power on.
To install an adapter, complete the following steps:
1. See the documentation that comes with the adapter for any cabling instructions
and information about jumper or switch settings. (It might be easier for you to
route cables before you install the adapter.)
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the adapter to any unpainted
metal surface on the server; then, remove the adapter from the package.
3. Determine the expansion-slot into which you will install the adapter.
4. Remove the expansion-slot cover, if one is installed.
5. If you are installing a full-length adapter, remove the blue adapter guide (if any)
from the end of the adapter. Otherwise, continue with the next step.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 201
Adapter guide
6. Press the adapter firmly into the expansion slot.
Attention: Incomplete insertion might cause damage to the system board or
the adapter.
7. Install the screw that secures the adapter to the server chassis.
8. Connect the adapter cables (see Internal cable routing and connectors on
page 149).
9. Close the rear adapter-retention bracket.
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Note: If the server is configured for RAID operation through an optional
ServeRAID adapter, you might have to reconfigure your disk arrays after you
install an adapter. See the ServeRAID documentation on the IBM ServeRAID
Support CD for additional information about RAID operation and complete
instructions for using ServeRAID Manager.
202 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the rear adapter-retention bracket
Rear adapter
retention bracket
Hinge pin
To remove the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Remove all adapters and place the adapters on a static-protective surface (see
Removing an adapter on page 199).
Note: You might find it helpful to note where each adapter is installed before
you remove the adapters.
5. Rotate the adapter-retention brackets to the open position.
6. Press the rear adapter-retention bracket and release the top hinge point; then,
release the other hinge point and remove the bracket from the chassis.
7. If you are instructed to return the rear adapter-retention bracket, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 203
Installing the rear adapter-retention bracket
To install the rear adapter-retention bracket, complete the following steps:
1. Insert the bottom hinge point on the rear adapter-retention bracket into the
matching hole in the chassis; then, insert the top hinge point into the matching
hole.
2. Install the adapters (see Installing an adapter on page 200).
3. Close the rear adapter-retention bracket.
4. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
5. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
204 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing and replacing Tier 2 CRUs
You may install a Tier 2 CRU yourself or request IBM to install it, at no additional
charge, under the type of warranty service that is designated for your server.
Removing the operator information panel assembly
To remove the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 205
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
9. Disconnect the operator information panel assembly cable from the system
board (see System board internal connectors on page 15).
10. Locate the operator information panel assembly release latch just above the
DVD drive.
11. Push up on the release latch while you pull the operator information panel
assembly toward the rear of the server; then, angle the back of the assembly
toward the system board and remove the assembly from the server.
12. If you are instructed to return the operator information panel assembly, follow
all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that
are supplied to you.
206 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the operator information panel assembly
To install the operator information panel assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the operator information
panel assembly to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove
the assembly from the package.
2. Angle the operator information panel assembly so that the edge of the
assembly is in the guide slot.
3. Slide the operator information panel assembly forward until the release latch
clicks into place.
4. Connect the operator information panel assembly cable to the system board
(see System board internal connectors on page 15 and Internal cable routing
and connectors on page 149).
5. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
6. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
7. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
8. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap
power supply on page 259).
9. Close the bezel.
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 207
Removing a voltage regulator module
Heat sink 2
Microprocessor 2
VRM
VRM connector
To remove a voltage regulator module (VRM), complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
cage (see Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Locate the voltage regulator module next to microprocessor 2.
9. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
10. Pull the VRM out of the connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the VRM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
208 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a voltage regulator module
Heat sink 2
Microprocessor 2
VRM
VRM connector
To install a voltage regulator module, complete the following steps:
1. Locate the VRM connector on the system board, next to the heat sink for
microprocessor 2 (see System board internal connectors on page 15).
2. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
3. Turn the VRM so that the keys align with the connector.
4. Insert the VRM into the connector by aligning the edges of the VRM with the
slots at the end of the VRM connector. Firmly press the VRM straight down into
the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the VRM simultaneously.
The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the VRM is seated in the
connector.
5. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
6. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
7. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap
power supply on page 259).
8. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 209
Removing the virtual media key
To remove the virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Carefully lay the server on its side so that it is lying flat and facing up.
Note: Be careful and do not drop the server.
5. Rotate the adapter-retention brackets to the open position.
6. Remove any adapters that prevent you from accessing the virtual media key
connector on the system board.
7. Press outward on the retention tab and pull the virtual media key out of the
connector.
Virtual media
key connector
Virtual media
key (front)
Virtual media
key (rear)
Retention
tab
Alignment
bracket
8. If you are instructed to return the virtual media key, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
210 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the virtual media key
To install a virtual media key, complete the following steps:
1. Align the alignment bracket on the rear of the key with the retention tab on the
system board; then, slide the key down into the virtual media key connector on
the system board until it is firmly seated in place.
Virtual media
key connector
Virtual media
key (front)
Virtual media
key (rear)
Retention
tab
Alignment
bracket
2. Reinstall any adapters that you removed.
3. Close the rear adapter-retention bracket.
4. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
5. Lock the left-side cover.
6. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Installing memory
The following notes describe the types of dual inline memory modules (DIMMs) that
your server supports and other information that you must consider when you install
DIMMs.
Attention: Do not mix UDIMMs and RDIMMs in the same server.
v The server supports industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 800, 1066, or
1333 MHz, PC3-10600R-999 (single- or dual-rank), registered, synchronous
dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)
with error correcting code (ECC). See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/
serverproven/compat/us/ for a list of supported memory modules for the server.
v At least one DIMM must be installed for each installed microprocessor for the
server to operate, but three DIMMs per microprocessor improves server
performance.
v When two microprocessors are installed in the server, distribute the DIMMs
between the two microprocessors to improve server performance.
v The server supports a maximum of 16 single- or dual-rank DIMMs.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 211
v The maximum number of single-, dual-rank, ECC supported UDIMM the server
supports is 12.
v The memory controller has three registered DIMM channels per microprocessor
(Channels 0, 1, and 2). Channels 0 and 1 support three DIMMS and Channel 2
supports two DIMMs.
v Install DIMMs starting with the connector farthest from the microprocessor within
each channel.
v The maximum operating speed of the server is determined by the slowest DIMM
in the server.
v The server can operate in three modes: sparing, mirroring and independent
channel modes.
Note: Memory sparing is only available for Intel Xeon 5600 series
microprocessor.
v The server supports 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and 8 GB DIMMs, with a minimum of 1
GB and a maximum of 128 GB of system memory.
For 32-bit operating systems only: Some memory is reserved for various
system resources and is unavailable to the operating system. The amount of
memory that is reserved for system resources depends on the operating system,
the configuration of the server, and the configured PCI devices.
Note: If you install a ServeRAID-M1015 SAS/SATA adapter, make sure at least 2
GB of memory is installed in the server before you run DSA from a bootable CD.
Independent channel mode
The server requires at least one installed DIMM per microprocessor. The server
comes with a minimum of two 1 GB DIMMs, installed in connectors 3 and 6.
(Connectors 3 and 6 are the farthest connectors from the microprocessor 1 for
channels 0 and 1.) When you install additional DIMMs, install them in the order
shown in Table 11, to maintain server performance.
Note:
v If you have configured the server to use memory mirroring, do not use the order
shown in this table; use the installation order that is shown in Table 13 on page
214.
v If you install a ServeRAID-M1015 SAS/SATA adapter, make sure at least 2 GB of
memory is installed in the server before you run DSA from a bootable CD.
Table 11. DIMM installation sequence for independent channel mode
Installed microprocessors DIMM connector population sequence
Microprocessor 1 3, 6, 8, 2, 5, 7, 1, 4
Microprocessor 1 and Microprocessor 2 3, 11, 6, 14, 8, 16, 2, 10, 5, 13, 7, 15, 1, 9,
4, 12
212 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Memory mirroring mode
Memory-mirroring mode replicates and stores data on two pairs of DIMMs within
two channels simultaneously. If a failure occurs, the memory controller switches
from the primary pair of memory DIMMs to the backup pair of DIMMs. You must
enable memory mirroring through the Setup utility. For details about enabling
memory mirroring, see Starting the Setup utility on page 287. When you use the
memory-mirroring feature, consider the following information:
v When you use memory mirroring, you must install a pair of DIMMs at a time.
One DIMM must be in channel 0, and the mirroring DIMM must be in the same
connector in channel 1. The two DIMMs in each pair must be identical in size,
type, rank (single or dual), and organization. They do not have to be identical in
speed. The channels run at the speed of the slowest DIMM in any of the
channels. See Table 13 on page 214 for the DIMM connectors that are in each
pair.
v Channel 2, DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring
mode.
v The maximum amount of available memory is reduced to half of the amount of
installed memory when memory mirroring is enabled. For example, if you install
64 GB of memory, only 32 GB of addressable memory is available when you use
memory mirroring.
The following illustration shows the memory channel interface layout with the DIMM
installation sequence for memory mirroring mode. The numbers within the boxes
indicate the DIMM population sequence in pairs within the channels, and the
numbers next to the boxes indicate the DIMM connectors within the channels. For
example, the following illustration shows that the first pair of DIMMs (indicated by 1s
inside the boxes) should be installed in DIMM connector 3 on channel 0 and DIMM
connector 6 on channel 1. DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 on channel 2 are not
used in memory-mirroring mode.
The following table lists the DIMM connectors on each memory channel.
Table 12. Connectors on each memory channel
Memory channel DIMM connectors
Channel 0 1, 2, 3, 9, 10, 11
Channel 1 4, 5, 6, 12, 13, 14
Channel 2 (not used in memory mirroring) 7, 8, 15, 16
Figure 11. Memory channel interface layout
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 213
The following illustration shows the memory connector layout that is associated with
each microprocessor. For example, DIMM connectors 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, and
16 (DIMM connectors are shown underneath the boxes) are associated with
microprocessor 2 socket (CPU2), and DIMM connectors 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8
are associated with microprocessor 1 socket (CPU1). The numbers within the boxes
indicate the installation sequence of the DIMM pairs. For example, the first DIMM
pair (indicated within the boxes by 1s) should be installed in DIMM connectors 3
and 6, which are associated with microprocessor 1 (CPU1).
Note: You can install DIMMs for microprocessor 2 as soon as you install
microprocessor 2; you do not have to wait until all of the DIMM connectors for
microprocessor 1 are filled.
The following table lists the installation sequence for installing DIMMs in
memory-mirroring mode.
Table 13. DIMM installation sequence for memory-mirroring mode
DIMMs
Number of installed
microprocessors DIMM connector
First pair of DIMMs 1 3, 6
Second pair of DIMMs 1 2, 5
Third pair of DIMMs 1 1, 4
Fourth pair of DIMMs 2 14, 11
Fifth pair of DIMMs 2 13, 10
Sixth pair of DIMMs 2 12, 9
Note: DIMM connectors 7, 8, 15, and 16 are not used in memory-mirroring mode.
When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information changes.
When you restart the server, the system displays a message that indicates that the
memory configuration has changed.
Memory sparing
The server supports memory sparing. This feature disables the failed memory from
the system configuration and activates a DIMM to replace the failed active DIMM.
You can enable either memory sparing or memory mirroring in the Setup utility (see
Using the Setup utility on page 287). When you use the memory sparing feature,
consider the following information:
v The memory sparing feature is supported on server models with an Intel Xeon

5600 series microprocessor.


v When you enable the memory sparing feature, you must install three DIMMs per
microprocessor at a time. The first DIMM must be in channel 0, the second
DIMM in channel 1, and the spare DIMM in channel 2. The DIMMs must be
214 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
identical in size, type, rank, and organization, but not in speed. The channels run
at the speed of the slowest DIMM in any of the channels.
v The maximum available memory is reduced to 2/3 of the installed memory when
memory sparing mode is enabled. For example, if you install 72 GB of memory
using RDIMMs, only 48 GB of addressable memory is available when you use
memory sparing.
The following table shows the installation sequence for installing DIMMs for each
microprocessor and the sparing DIMM in memory online-spare mode:
Table 14. Memory sparing mode DIMM population sequence
DIMMs
Number of installed
microprocessors DIMM slots
1st set of DIMMs 1 3, 6, 8
2nd set of DIMMs 1 2, 5, 7
3rd set of DIMMs 2 11, 14, 16
4th set of DIMMs 2 10, 13, 15
Notes:
1. The 3rd and 4th sets of DIMMs can be installed right after microprocessor 2 is
installed even 1st and 2nd sets of DIMM slots are not full.
2. DIMM slots 1, 4, 9, and 12 are not used in memory sparing mode.
Removing a memory module
Retaining
clip
DIMM
To remove a dual inline memory module (DIMM), complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
cage (see Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board (see System board internal
connectors on page 15).
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 215
Attention: To avoid breaking the retaining clips or damaging the DIMM
connectors, handle the clips gently.
9. Move the DIMM retaining clips on the side of the DIMM connector to the open
position by pressing the retaining clips away from the center of the DIMM
connector.
10. Using your fingers, lift the DIMM out of the DIMM connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the DIMM, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Installing a memory module
To install a memory module, complete the following steps:
1. Locate the DIMM connectors on the system board (see System board internal
connectors on page 15). Determine the connectors into which you will install
the DIMMs.
2. Open the retaining clip on each end of the DIMM connector.
3. Touch the static-protective package containing the DIMM to any unpainted
metal surface on the outside of the server. Then, remove the DIMM from the
package.
4. Turn the DIMM so that the DIMM keys align correctly with the connector.
216 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
5. Insert the DIMM into the connector by aligning the edges of the DIMM with the
slots at the ends of the DIMM connector.
6. Firmly press the DIMM straight down into the connector by applying pressure
on both ends of the DIMM simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the
locked position when the DIMM is firmly seated in the connector.
Note: If there is a gap between the DIMM and the retaining clips, the DIMM
has not been correctly inserted; open the retaining clips, remove the DIMM,
and then reinsert it.
7. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
8. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
9. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap
power supply on page 259).
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
In two-DIMM-per-channel configuration, a server with an Intel Xeon X5600 series
microprocessor automatically operates with a maximum memory speed of up to
1333 MHz when one of the following conditions is met:
v Two 1.5 V single-rank or dual-rank RDIMMs are installed in the same channel. In
the Setup utility, Memory speed is set to Max performance mode
v Two 1.35 V single-rank or dual-ranl RDIMMs are installed in the same channel.
In the Setup utility, Memory speed is set to Max performance and LV-DIMM
power is set to Enhance performance mode. The 1.35 V RDIMMs will function
at 1.5 V
The following notes describe the types of DIMMs that the server supports and other
information that you must consider when you install DIMMs.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 217
v When you install or remove DIMMs, the server configuration information
changes. When you restart the server, the system displays a message that
indicates that the memory configuration has changed.
v The server supports only industry-standard double-data-rate 3 (DDR3), 800,
1066, or 1333 MHz, PC3-10600R-999, registered or unbuffered, synchronous
dynamic random-access memory (SDRAM) dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)
with error correcting code (ECC). See http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/
serverproven/compat/us/ for a list of supported memory modules for the server.
The specifications of a DDR3 DIMM are on a label on the DIMM, in the
following format.
ggg eRxff-PC3-wwwwwm-aa-bb-cc
where:
ggg is the total capacity of the DIMM (for example, 1GB, 2GB, or 4GB)
e is the number of ranks
1 = single-rank
2 = dual-rank
4 = quad-rank
ff is the device organization (bit width)
4 = x4 organization (4 DQ lines per SDRAM)
8 = x8 organization
16 = x16 organization
wwwww is the DIMM bandwidth, in MBps
6400 = 6.40 GBps (PC3-800 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
8500 = 8.53 GBps (PC3-1066 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
10600 = 10.66 GBps (PC3-1333 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
12800 = 12.80 GBps PC3-1600 SDRAMs, 8-byte primary data bus)
m is the DIMM type
E = Unbuffered DIMM (UDIMM) with ECC (x72-bit module data bus)
R = Registered DIMM (RDIMM)
U = Unbuffered DIMM with no ECC (x64-bit primary data bus)
aa is the CAS latency, in clocks at maximum operating frequency
bb is the JEDEC SPD Revision Encoding and Additions level
cc is the reference design file for the design of the DIMM
d is the revision number of the reference design of the DIMM
Note: To determine the type of a DIMM, see the label on the DIMM. The
information on the label is in the format xxxxx nRxxx PC3-xxxxx-xx-xx-xxx. The
numeral in the sixth numerical position indicates whether the DIMM is single-rank
(n=1), dual-rank (n=2), or quad-rank (n=4).
v The following rules apply to DDR3 DIMM speed as it relates to the number of
DIMMs in a channel:
When you install 1 DIMM per channel, the memory runs at 1333 MHz
When you install 2 DIMMs per channel, the memory runs at 1066 MHz
When you install 3 DIMMs per channel, the memory runs at 800 MHz
All channels in a server run at the fastest common frequency
Do not install registered and unbuffered DIMMs in the same server
218 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v The maximum memory speed is determined by the combination of the
microprocessor, DIMM speed, and the number of DIMMs installed in each
channel.
v In two-DIMM-per-channel configuration, a server with an Intel Xeon X5600 series
microprocessor automatically operates with a maximum memory speed of up to
1333 MHz when one of the following conditions is met:
Two 1.5 V single-rank or dual-rank RDIMMs are installed in the same channel.
In the Setup utility, Memory speed is set to Max performance mode
Two 1.35 V single-rank or dual-ranl RDIMMs are installed in the same
channel. In the Setup utility, Memory speed is set to Max performance and
LV-DIMM power is set to Enhance performance mode. The 1.35 V RDIMMs
will function at 1.5 V
v
Note: The server does not support quad-rank RDIMM.
The server supports a maximum of 16 single-rank or dual-rank RDIMMs. The
server supports up to 12 single-rank or dual-rank UDIMMs.
v The server supports three single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs per channel on
channel 0 and 1, two single-rank or dual-rank DIMMs on channel 2. The following
table shows an example of the maximum amount of memory that you can install
using ranked DIMMs:
Table 15. Maximum memory installation using ranked DIMMs
Number of DIMMs DIMM type DIMM size Total memory
12 Single-rank UDIMMs 2 GB 24 GB
12 Dual-rank UDIMMs 4 GB 48 GB
16 Single-rank RDIMMs 2 GB 32 GB
16 Dual-rank RDIMMs 2 GB 32 GB
16 Dual-rank RDIMMs 4 GB 64 GB
16 Dual-rank RDIMMs 8 GB 128 GB
v The RDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB, 4 GB, and
8 GB. The server supports a minimum of 1 GB and a maximum of 128 GB of
system memory using RDIMMs.
For 32-bit operating systems only: Some memory is reserved for various
system resources and is unavailable to the operating system. The amount of
memory that is reserved for system resources depends on the operating system,
the configuration of the server, and the configured PCI devices.
v The UDIMM options that are available for the server are 1 GB, 2 GB and 4 GB.
The server supports a minimum of 1 GB and a maximum of 48 GB of system
memory using UDIMMs.
Note: The amount of usable memory is reduced depending on the system
configuration. A certain amount of memory must be reserved for system
resources. To view the total amount of installed memory and the amount of
configured memory, run the Setup utility.
Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device
To remove a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Installation guidelines
on page 135.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 219
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see Removing the left-side cover on page 166).
4. Unlock the retention latch by pushing it down toward the system board.
5. Grasp the flash device and pull to remove it from the connector.
6. Return the retention latch to the locked position by pulling it away from the
system board.
7. If you are instructed to return the flash device, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
220 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device
To install a hypervisor flash device, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Installation guidelines
on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see Removing the left-side cover on page 166).
4. Unlock the retention latch by pushing it down toward the system board.
5. Align the flash device with the USB connector on the system board and push it
into the USB connector until it is firmly seated.
6. Return the retention latch to the locked position by pulling it away from the
system board.
7. Reconnect the power cord and any cables that you removed.
8. Install the cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page 166).
9. Turn on the peripheral devices and the server.
Removing an optional ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key
To remove an optional ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key, complete the
following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Installation guidelines
on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see Removing the left-side cover on page 166).
4. Rotate the adapter-retention brackets to the open position.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 221
5. Grasp the upgrade key and lift to remove it from connector on the ServeRAID
adapter.
6. Close the rear adapter-retention bracket.
222 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
8. Lock the left-side cover.
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
10. If you are instructed to return the feature key, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
Installing an optional ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key
To install an optional ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key, complete the
following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Installation guidelines
on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices and disconnect the power cords.
3. Remove the cover (see Removing the left-side cover on page 166).
4. Rotate the adapter-retention brackets to the open position.
5. Align the upgrade key with the connector on the ServeRAID adapter and push it
into the connector until it is firmly seated.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 223
6. Close the rear adapter-retention bracket.
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
8. Lock the left-side cover.
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Removing the bezel
To remove the bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Unlock the left-side cover.
Note: You must unlock the left-side cover to open or remove the bezel. When
you lock the left-side cover, it locks both the cover and the bezel.
3. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
224 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
4. Press the retention tabs on each hinge assembly toward each other and pull the
hinge assemblies out of the chassis.
Note: You might need a flat-blade screwdriver to pry the hinge assemblies out
of the chassis.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 225
Note: The bezel also disengages from the chassis hinges if you rotate the
bezel beyond 180 or if excessive pressure is applied to the bezel. Do not be
alarmed, because this is how the bezel was designed. The bezel is designed
with breakaway hinges so that you can easily reattach it to the chassis.
5. If you are instructed to return the bezel, follow all packaging instructions, and
use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
226 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the bezel
To install the bezel, complete the following steps:
1. Align the hinge assemblies with the hinge holes on the chassis.
2. Push the hinges into the holes on the chassis until they snap into place.
3. If you removed the bezel by detaching the sliding hinge mount from the hinge
assembly (using the breakaway method as the bezel was designed for),
complete the following steps to reattach the bezel:
a. Press in on the rear of the sliding hinge mount until it extends beyond the
edge of the bezel, and hold it in place.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 227
b. Align the sliding hinge mount with the hinge pin on the hinge assembly on
the chassis.
c. Press the sliding hinge mount against the hinge pin until the sliding hinge
mount snaps onto the hinge pin.
4. Close the bezel.
5. Lock the left-side cover.
Removing the fan cage assembly
To remove the fan cage assembly, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
228 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the hot-swap power supply or power supplies from the power-supply
cage (see Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. If any full-length PCI adapters are installed, remove them (see Removing an
adapter on page 199).
8. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
9. Press the fan cage release latches on each side of the fan cage toward the
sides of the server. The fan cage will lift up slightly when the release latches
are fully open.
10. Grasp the fan cage assembly and lift it out of the server.
11. If you are instructed to return the fan cage assembly, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Installing the fan cage assembly
To install the fan cage assembly, complete the following steps.
Attention: Make sure that all wires and cables inside the server are routed
correctly before you install the fan cage assembly. Wiring that is not properly routed
might be damaged or might prevent the fan cage assembly from seating properly in
the server.
1. Align the guides on the fan cage with release latches on each side.
2. Push the fan cage assembly into the server until both release buttons click into
place.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 229
Note: Make sure that the fan cage is fully seated in the server and that both of
the release buttons click into place.
3. If you removed any full-length PCI adapters, install them (see Installing an
adapter on page 200).
4. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
5. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
6. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap
power supply on page 259).
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
230 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing an optional tape drive
To remove an optional full-high tape drive, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords and
all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 231
5. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the back of the tape drive.
6. Grasp the blue tabs on each side of the tape drive and press them inward while
you pull the drive out of the server.
7. Note the location of the blue rails on the tape drive; then, remove the blue rails
and save them for future use.
8. Gently pull the tape drive out of the server.
9. If you are instructed to return the tape drive, follow all packaging instructions,
and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to you.
232 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing an optional tape drive
To install an optional full-height tape drive, complete the following steps:
1. Remove the EMC shields from the drive bay, if any are installed.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the tape drive to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the tape drive from the
package.
3. Install the blue rails on the tape drive.
4. Align the rails on the tape drive with the guides in the drive bay; then, slide the
tape drive into the drive bay until the rails click into place.
5. Connect one of the connectors on the optical drive power cable to the tape
drive. If however, you are installing an RDX internal USB tape drive, you will
need to install the SATA to traditional power converter cable. Locate the SATA to
traditional power converter cable that came with the server in the plastic bag
with the drive rails; then connect one end of the converter cable to the third
connector (the default connector) on the optical drive power cable and connect
the other end of the cable to the tape drive as shown in the following
illustrations.
Connects to
tape drive
Connects to
optical power cable
Power
converter
cable
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 233
Power converter
cable
Optical power cable
SATA connector
Tape drive
6. Connect one end of the tape drive signal cable to the tape drive and the other
end to the connector on the system board. Route the cable through the plastic
slots on the bottom of the chassis underneath the fan cage assembly. For more
information, see Internal cable routing and connectors.
7. Close the bezel.
8. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
9. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
234 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly
To remove the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly from the server,
complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices; then, disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Carefully lay the server down on its side.
6. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
7. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
8. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
9. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
10. Disconnect the light path diagnostics cable from the system board (see
System board internal connectors on page 15 and Internal cable routing and
connectors on page 149).
11. Stand the server back up in its vertical position.
12. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
13. Press down on the release latch on the top of the USB cable and light path
diagnostics assembly mounting bracket; then, rotate the top of the mounting
bracket away from the server.
14. Lift the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly mounting bracket out
and away from the server while you pull the diagnostics cable through the
hole.
15. Disconnect the USB cable from the USB cable and light path diagnostics
assembly:
a. Rotate the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly mounting
bracket so that you are looking at the rear of the bracket.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 235
b. Squeeze the retaining clips on each side of the USB cable connector and
pull the USB cable away from the mounting bracket.
16. If you are instructed to return the USB cable and light path diagnostics
assembly, follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials
for shipping that are supplied to you.
236 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly
To install the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly, complete the following
steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the USB cable and light path
diagnostics assembly to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then,
remove the assembly from the package.
2. Connect the USB cable to the replacement USB cable and light path
diagnostics assembly:
a. Rotate the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly mounting
bracket so that you are looking at the rear of the bracket.
b. Squeeze the retaining clips on each side of the USB cable connector and
align the key on the cable connector with the notch on the mounting
bracket.
c. Insert the connector into the mounting bracket; then, release the retaining
clips.
3. Feed the light path diagnostics cable into the server through the opening in the
front of the server.
4. Position the bottom of the USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly
mounting bracket into the opening and rotate the top of the bracket toward the
server until it clicks into place.
5. Connect the light path diagnostics cable to the system board. See System
board internal connectors on page 15 andInternal cable routing and
connectors on page 149 to locate the USB and light path diagnostics
connectors on the system board.
6. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
7. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
8. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
9. Install the hot-swap power supply or power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap
power supply on page 259).
10. Install the bezel (see Installing the bezel on page 227).
11. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 237
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
238 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane
To remove a 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Open the bezel by pressing the button on the left edge of the bezel, and rotate
the left side of the bezel away from the server.
5. Remove the hot-swap hard disk drives (see Removing a 2.5-inch hot-swap
hard disk drive on page 171).
6. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
7. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
8. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
9. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
10. Note where the power, signal, and configuration cables are connected to the
2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane; then, disconnect them (see Hard disk
drive backplane connectors on page 20).
11. Lift the retention latches that hold the backplane in place; then, grasp the top
edge of the backplane and rotate it toward the rear of the server. When the
backplane is clear of the drive-cage retention tabs, remove it from the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 239
12. If you are removing another SAS backplane, repeat steps 10 on page 239 and
11 on page 239 to remove the remaining backplane.
13. If you are instructed to return the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
240 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane
To install a 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the hard disk drive backplane
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the backplane
from the package.
2. Position the 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane in the drive-cage retention tabs;
then, rotate the top of the backplane toward the locator pins until the latches
click into place.
3. Connect the power, signal, and configuration cables to the 2.5-inch hard disk
drive backplane (see Hard disk drive backplane connectors on page 20 and
Internal cable routing and connectors on page 149).
4. If you are replacing another 2.5-inch hard disk drive backplane, repeat steps 1
through 3 to install the additional backplane.
5. Install the hot-swap hard disk drives (see Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard
disk drive on page 173).
6. Close the bezel.
7. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
8. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
9. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
10. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
11. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 241
Removing the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane
To remove the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane from both the upper and
bottom 3.5-inch disk drive cages, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page viiand Installation guidelines
on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Open the bezel.
5. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
6. Remove the hot-swap hard disk drives that are installed in the hard disk drive
cage (see Removing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive on page 175).
7. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
8. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.
242 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
9. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
10. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
11. Disconnect the power, signal, and configuration cables from the 3.5-inch hard
disk drive backplane.
12. Lift up on the spring-release latch on the drive cage and rotate the backplane
away from the drive cage until the backplane tab disengages from the drive
cage.
13. If you are instructed to return the 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane,
follow all packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping
that are supplied to you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 243
Installing the 3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane
To install the 3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane on both the upper and bottom
3.5-inch disk drive cages, complete the following steps.
1. Insert the bottom tabs of the 3.5inch hard disk drive backplane onto the lower
lip of the drive cage.
2. Rotate the backplane toward the drive cage until it locks in place in the
retention tab of the spring-release latch on the drive cage.
3. Reconnect the power, configuration, and signal cables to the 3.5-inch hard disk
drive backplane. For more information, see Internal cable routing and
connectors.
4. Install the hot-swap hard disk drives that were removed from the hard disk
drive cage (see Installing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive on page 177).
5. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
6. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
7. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly
into the chassis.
244 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
8. Close the bezel.
9. Install the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page 166).
10. Lock the left-side cover.
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 245
Removing the simple-swap backplate
To remove the simple-swap backplate, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page viiand Installation guidelines
on page 135.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
4. Open the bezel.
5. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
6. Remove the simple-swap hard disk drives that are installed in the hard disk
drive cage (see Removing a simple-swap hard disk drive on page 179).
7. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
8. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly out of the chassis. Lift up the
power-supply cage handle and pull the power-supply cage assembly all the
way up until the retainer latch locks the cage in place on the chassis.
246 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
9. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
10. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
11. Disconnect the power, signal, and configuration cables from the 3.5-inch hard
disk drive backplane.
12. Lift the latch and rotate the simple-swap backplate away from the drive cage
as shown in the illustration.
13. Remove the simple-swap backplate and set it aside.
14. If you are instructed to return the simple-swap backplate, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 247
Installing the simple-swap backplate
To install the simple-swap backplate, complete the following steps.
1. Insert the bottom tabs of the replacement simple-swap backplate onto the slots
on the lower lip of the drive cage.
2. Rotate the simple-swap backplate toward the drive cage (make sure to align it
with the locator pin) until it locks in place in the retaining tabs of the
spring-release latch on the drive cage.
3. Reconnect the power, configuration, and signal cables to the 3.5-inch hard disk
drive backplate. For more information, see Internal cable routing and
connectors.
4. Install the simple-swap hard disk drives that were removed from the hard disk
drive cage (see Installing a simple-swap hard disk drive on page 181).
5. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
6. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
7. Rotate the power-supply cage assembly back into the server. Press the
power-supply cage release tab and rotate the power-supply cage assembly
into the chassis.
248 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
8. Close the bezel.
9. Install the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page 166).
10. Lock the left-side cover.
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 249
Removing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage
To remove the 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps.
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
9. Turn the server upright and open the bezel by pressing the button on the left
edge of the bezel, and rotate the left side of the bezel away from the server.
10. Remove all of the disk drives from the 2.5-inch disk drive cage (see Removing
a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive on page 171).
11. Disconnect the cables from the 2.5-inch disk drive backplane.
12. Press both drive cage release latches inward; then, pull the drive cage out of
the front of server.
250 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
13. Remove the backplane from the 2.5-inch disk drive cage (see Removing a
2.5-inch disk drive backplane on page 239).
14. If you are instructed to return the 2.5-inch disk drive cage, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 251
Installing the 2.5-inch disk drive cage
To install a 2.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the 2.5-inch disk drive cage
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive cage
from the package.
2. Install the 2.5-inch disk drive backplane in the back of the drive cage (see
Installing a 2.5-inch disk drive backplane on page 241).
3. Slide the 2.5-inch disk drive cage into the opening in the front of the server;
then, press drive cage in until the release latches click into place.
4. Install any hot-swap hard disk drives that were removed from the drive cage
(see Installing a 2.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive on page 173).
5. Close the bezel.
6. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
7. Connect the power and signal cables from the system board to the 2.5-inch
disk drive backplane (see Hard disk drive backplane connectors on page 20
and Internal cable routing and connectors on page 149).
8. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
9. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
10. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
11. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
12. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
13. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
252 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing and replacing FRUs
FRUs must be installed only by trained service technicians.
The illustrations in this document might differ slightly from the hardware.
Removing the upper 3.5-inch disk drive cage
To remove the 3.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
9. Turn the server upright and open the bezel by pressing the button on the left
edge of the bezel, and rotate the left side of the bezel away from the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 253
10. Remove all of the disk drives from the 3.5-inch disk drive cage (see Removing
a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive on page 175).
11. Disconnect the cables from the 3.5-inch disk drive backplane.
12. Disconnect the UltraSlim DVD drive cables from the system board if any.
13. Remove the screws that hold the 3.5-inch disk drive cage. Save the screws for
future use.
14. Pull the drive cage out of the front of server.
15. Remove the UltraSlim DVD drive if installed.
16. Remove the backplane from the 3.5-inch disk drive cage (see Removing the
3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive backplane on page 242).
17. Install the EMC shields.
18. Install all the EMC fillers.
19. If you are instructed to return the 3.5-inch disk drive cage, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
254 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the upper 3.5-inch disk drive cage
To install a 3.5-inch hard disk drive cage, complete the following steps:
1. Remove all the EMC fillers.
2. Remove the optical DVD drive if installed.
3. Remove the EMC shields and store them for future use.
4. Touch the static-protective package that contains the 3.5-inch disk drive cage
to any unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the drive cage
from the package.
5. Install the UltraSlim DVD drive in to the slim slot on top of the upper 3.5-inch
disk drive cage; follow steps from 2 on page 191 to 2o on page 195.
6. Install the 3.5-inch disk drive backplane in the back of the drive cage (see
Installing the 3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane on page 244).
7. Slide the 3.5-inch disk drive cage into the upper opening of the server along
the lower edge of the opening.
Note: Pull the power and signal cables of the UltraSlim DVD drive into the
upper opening of the server first. Make sure the cables are not stuck when you
slide the disk drive cage into the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 255
8. Align the holes in the edge of 3.5-inch disk drive cage with the holes in the
edge of the server rack.
9. Insert the screws to secure the 3.5-inch disk drive cage in place.
10. Install any hot-swap hard disk drives that were removed from the drive cage
(see Installing a 3.5-inch hot-swap hard disk drive on page 177).
11. Close the bezel.
12. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
13. Connect the power and signal cables between the system board and the
3.5-inch disk drive backplane and UltraSlim DVD drive (see Hard disk drive
backplane connectors on page 20 and Internal cable routing and connectors
on page 149).
14. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
15. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
16. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
17. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
18. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
19. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
256 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Turning the stabilizing feet
To rotate the front feet, complete the following steps:
1. Carefully position the server on a flat surface, with the feet hanging over the
edge of the flat surface to ease removal.
2. Press in on the clips that hold the feet in place; then, pry the feet away from the
server. In some cases, you might need a screwdriver to press in on the clips.
Feet
3. Reinstall the feet in the opposite location, with the tab on the feet extending
beyond the edge of the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 257
Removing a hot-swap power supply
If you install or remove a hot-swap power supply, observe the following precautions.
Statement 8:
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.
Note: If only one hot-swap power supply is installed in the server, you must turn off
the server before removing the power supply.
To remove a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Disconnect the power cord from the connector on the back of the power supply
that you are removing.
258 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
3. Press the release latch on the power supply and pull the power supply out of
the power-supply cage.
4. If you are instructed to return the hot-swap power supply, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Note: All fixed power supply unit should be FRU unless said so.
Installing a hot-swap power supply
If you install or remove a hot-swap power supply, observe the following precautions.
Statement 8:
CAUTION:
Never remove the cover on a power supply or any part that has the following
label attached.
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside any
component that has this label attached. There are no serviceable parts inside
these components. If you suspect a problem with one of these parts, contact
a service technician.
To install a hot-swap power supply, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 259
Attention: Static electricity that is released to internal server components
when the server is powered-on might cause the server to halt, which might
result in the loss of data. To avoid this potential problem, always use an
electrostatic-discharge wrist strap or other grounding system when you work
inside the server with the power on.
2. Touch the static-protective package that contains the power supply to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power supply from the
package.
3. Remove the power-supply filler panel from the power bay, if one is installed.
4. Place the power supply into the power-supply cage and push it in until it locks
into place.
Note: If only one hot-swap power supply is installed in the server, a
power-supply filler must be installed in the empty power bay.
5. Connect one end of the power cord for the new power supply into the connector
on the back of the power supply; then, connect the other end of the power cord
to a properly grounded electrical outlet.
Note: If the server has been turned off, you must wait approximately 3 minutes
after you connect the server power cord to an electrical outlet before the
power-control button becomes active.
6. Make sure that the AC power LED on the top of the power supply is lit,
indicating that the power supply is operating correctly. If the server is turned on,
make sure that the AC power LED on the top of the power supply is lit also.
Note: All fixed power supply unit should be FRU unless said so.
260 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the power-supply cage
To remove the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
4. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
5. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 261
8. Remove the power cable shield:
a. Note how the power-supply cage cables are routed behind the power cable
shield.
b. Press down on the power cable shield retention latch.
c. Slide the power cable shield toward the front of the server to disengage the
locating tabs; then, remove the power cable shield.
9. Disconnect the power-supply cage cables from the system board.
10. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
11. Remove the three screws on the rear of the server that secure the cage to the
server chassis; then, remove the cage from the server.
12. If you are instructed to return the power-supply cage, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
262 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the power-supply cage
To install the power-supply cage, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the power-supply cage to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the power-supply cage
from the package.
2. Position the hinge so that the power-supply cage would be in the open position
if it were installed in the server.
3. Move the hinge inside the server chassis and align the screw holes with the
holes in the chassis.
4. Secure the power-supply cage to the chassis, using three screws.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 263
5. Connect the power-supply cage cables and install the power cable shield:
a. Route the system power and ADV power cables behind the power cable
shield as shown in the illustration; then, connect the cables to the system
board (see System board internal connectors on page 15).
b. Place the power cable shield over the power cables and align the locating
tabs on the cable shield with the corresponding slots in the server chassis.
c. Press down on the power cable shield and slide it toward the rear of the
server until it clicks into place.
264 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
d. Route the CPU power and PSU control cables through the cable tie on the
rear of server chassis; then, connect the cables to the system board (see
System board internal connectors on page 15)
6. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
7. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
8. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
9. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
10. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 265
Removing an extender card
To remove an extender card, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove any adapters that are installed in the expansion slots (see Removing
an adapter on page 199).
6. Remove the system board and place it on a static-protective surface (see
Removing the system board on page 281).
Note: Do not remove the DIMMs, heat sinks, microprocessors, VRM, or battery
from the system board.
266 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
7. Remove the two screws that secure the extender card to the system board tray.
8. Pull the extender card out of the system board connector.
9. If you are instructed to return the extender card, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 267
Installing an extender card
To install an extender card, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the extender card to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the extender card from the
package.
2. Align the extender card with its connector on the system board; then, slide the
extender card into the connector.
3. Install the two screws that secure the extender card to the system board tray.
4. Install the system board in the server (see Installing the system board on page
283).
5. Install any adapters that you removed from the expansion slots (see Installing
an adapter on page 200).
6. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
7. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
268 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a microprocessor and heat sink
To remove a microprocessor, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and peripheral devices, and disconnect the power cords
and all external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Remove the microprocessor heat sink:
a. Lift the heat-sink release lever to the fully open position.
b. Rotate the back of the heat sink out of the retention bracket and remove
the heat sink from the server.
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat
sink. Touching the thermal grease will contaminate it. If the thermal grease
on the microprocessor or heat sink becomes contaminated, you must
replace it. See Thermal grease on page 276 for more information.
9. Lift the microprocessor-release latch to the fully open position (approximately
135 angle); then, lift the bracket frame and remove the microprocessor from
the socket.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 269
10. If you are removing microprocessor 2, remove the voltage regulator module
(VRM) from the connector next to microprocessor socket 2.
a. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
b. Pull the VRM out of the connector.
11. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
270 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing a microprocessor and heat sink
The following notes describe the types of microprocessor that the server supports
and other information that you must consider when you install a microprocessor:
v The server supports certain Intel Xeon scalable multi-core microprocessors,
which are designed for the LGA 1366 socket. These microprocessors are 64-bit
dual-core or quad-core microprocessors with an integrated memory controller,
quick-path interconnect, and shared last cache. See http://www.ibm.com/servers/
eserver/serverproven/compat/us/ for a list of supported microprocessors.
v The server supports up to two microprocessors. If the server comes with one
microprocessor, you can install a second microprocessor.
v Both microprocessors must have the same QuickPath Interconnect (QPI) link
speed, integrated memory controller frequency, core frequency, power segment,
cache size, and type.
v Read the documentation that comes with the microprocessor to determine
whether you must update the server firmware. To download the most current
level of server firmware and many other code updates for your server, complete
the following steps:
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3400 M3 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.
v (Optional) Obtain an SMP-capable operating system. For a list of supported
operating systems and optional devices, see http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/
serverproven/compat/us/.
v To order additional microprocessor optional devices, contact your IBM marketing
representative or authorized reseller.
v The microprocessor speeds are automatically set for this server; therefore, you
do not have to set any microprocessor frequency-selection jumpers or switches.
v If you have to replace a microprocessor, call for service.
v The heat-sink FRU is packaged with the thermal grease applied to the underside:
If the thermal-grease protective cover (for example, a plastic cap or tape liner)
is removed from the heat sink, do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom
of the heat sink or set down the heat sink.
You must replace the thermal grease if it becomes contaminated or has come
in contact with another object other than its paired microprocessor.
The thermal grease is available as a separate FRU.
v Do not remove the first microprocessor from the system board to install the
second microprocessor.
v Some models support dual-core processors and quad-core processors. Do not
use dual-core processors and quad-core processors in the same server. Install all
dual-core or all quad-core processors in the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 271
To install a microprocessor, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the microprocessor from
the package.
2. Open the microprocessor socket by pressing down on the end of the release
lever, moving it to the side, and slowly releasing it to the open (up) position.
3. Open the microprocessor bracket frame and remove the microprocessor filler,
if one is installed.
Attention:
a. Do not touch the microprocessor contacts; handle the microprocessor by
the edges only. Contaminants on the microprocessor contacts, such as oil
from your skin, can cause connection failures between the contacts and
the socket.
b. Handle the microprocessor carefully. Dropping the microprocessor during
installation or removal can damage the contacts.
c. Do not use excessive force when you press the microprocessor into the
socket.
272 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
d. Make sure that the microprocessor is oriented, aligned, and positioned in
the socket before you try to close the lever.
4. Install the microprocessor:
a. Touch the static-protective package that contains the microprocessor to any
unpainted metal surface on the server. Then, remove the microprocessor
from the package.
b. Remove the protective cover, tape, or label from the surface of the
microprocessor socket, if any is present.
c. Align the microprocessor with the socket. The microprocessor has two
notches that are keyed to two tabs on the sides of the socket. A
triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor points to a
45-degree angle on one corner of the socket.
d. Carefully place the microprocessor into the socket. Do not use excessive
force when you press the microprocessor into the socket.
Note: The microprocessor fits only one way on the socket.
5. Close the microprocessor bracket frame and hold it down; then, close the
microprocessor retention latch and lock it securely in place.
6. Install a heat sink on the microprocessor.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 273
Attention: Do not touch the thermal grease on the bottom of the heat sink or
set down the heat sink after you remove the plastic cover. Touching the
thermal grease will contaminate it. If the thermal grease is contaminated, call
IBM service to request a replacement thermal grease kit. For information about
installing the replacement thermal grease, see Thermal grease on page 276.
a. Make sure that the heat-sink release lever is in the fully open position.
b. Remove the plastic protective cover from the bottom of the heat sink, if one
is installed.
c. Position the heat sink above the microprocessor with the thermal-grease
side down.
Attention: The heat sink is keyed to the retention module. Make sure
that the notch on the heat sink fits over the alignment tab on the retention
module.
d. Align the notch on the heat sink with the alignment tab on the retainer
module.
e. Slide the rear flange of the heat sink into the opening in the retainer
bracket.
f. Press down firmly on the front of the heat sink until it is seated securely.
g. Rotate the heat-sink release lever to the closed position and hook it
underneath the locking tab.
274 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
7. If you are installing microprocessor 2, install a VRM in the connector next to
microprocessor socket 2 (see System board internal connectors on page 15
for the VRM connector location).
Note: A VRM must be installed for microprocessor 2. The server will not start
if microprocessor 2 is installed without a VRM.
a. Open the retaining clips on each end of the VRM connector.
b. Turn the VRM so that the keys align with the connector.
c. Insert the VRM into the connector by aligning the edges of the VRM with
the slots at the end of the VRM connector. Firmly press the VRM straight
down into the connector by applying pressure on both ends of the VRM
simultaneously. The retaining clips snap into the locked position when the
VRM is seated in the connector.
8. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
9. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
10. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
11. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
12. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 275
Thermal grease
The thermal grease must be replaced whenever the heat sink has been removed
from the top of the microprocessor and is going to be reused or when debris is
found in the grease.
To replace damaged or contaminated thermal grease on the microprocessor and
heat sink, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat sink on a clean work surface.
2. Remove the cleaning pad from its package and unfold it completely.
3. Use the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the bottom of the heat
sink.
Note: Make sure that all of the thermal grease is removed.
4. Use a clean area of the cleaning pad to wipe the thermal grease from the
microprocessor; then, dispose of the cleaning pad after all of the thermal grease
is removed.
Microprocessor
0.02 mL of thermal
grease
5. Use the thermal-grease syringe to place 9 uniformly spaced dots of 0.02 mL
each on the top of the microprocessor. The outermost dots must be within
approximately 5 mm of the edge. This is to ensure uniform distribution.
Note: 0.01 mL is one tick mark on the syringe. If the grease is properly applied,
approximately half (0.22 mL) of the grease will remain in the syringe.
6. Install the heat sink onto the microprocessor as described in Installing a
microprocessor and heat sink on page 271.
276 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a heat-sink retention module
Alignment
triangle
To remove a heat-sink retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Remove the heat sink (see Removing a microprocessor and heat sink on
page 269).
9. Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws that secure the heat-sink
retention module to the system board; then, lift the heat-sink retention module
from the system board.
10. If you are instructed to return the heat-sink retention module, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 277
Installing a heat-sink retention module
Alignment
triangle
To install a heat-sink retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Place the heat-sink retention module in the microprocessor location on the
system board.
2. Using a Phillips screwdriver, install the four screws that secure the module to
the system board.
3. Install the heat sink (see Installing a microprocessor and heat sink on page
271).
Attention: Make sure that you install each heat sink with its paired
microprocessor.
4. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
5. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
6. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
278 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing a microprocessor retention module
To remove a microprocessor retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Remove the heat sink and the microprocessor (see Removing a
microprocessor and heat sink on page 269).
9. Using a T8 Torx screwdriver, remove the four screws that secure the
microprocessor retention module to the system board; then, lift the
microprocessor retention module from the system board.
10. If you are instructed to return the microprocessor retention module, follow all
packaging instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are
supplied to you.
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 279
Installing a microprocessor retention module
To install a microprocessor retention module, complete the following steps:
1. Orient the triangle-shaped indicator on one corner of the microprocessor
retention module to the corresponding alignment triangle on the system board;
then, place the retention module on the system board.
2. Using a T8 Torx screwdriver, install the four screws that secure the module to
the system board.
3. Install the microprocessor and heat sink (see Installing a microprocessor and
heat sink on page 271).
Attention: Make sure that you install each heat sink with its paired
microprocessor.
4. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
5. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
6. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
7. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
8. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
280 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Removing the system board
To remove the system board, complete the following steps:
1. Read the safety information that begins on page vii and Handling
static-sensitive devices on page 137.
2. Turn off the server and all attached devices; then, disconnect all power cords
and external cables.
3. Carefully turn the server on its side so that it is lying flat, with the cover facing
up.
Attention: Do not allow the server to fall over.
4. Unlock and remove the left-side cover (see Removing the left-side cover on
page 166).
5. Remove the power supply or power supplies from the power-supply cage (see
Removing a hot-swap power supply on page 258).
6. Rotate the power-supply cage to its open position (see Opening the
power-supply cage on page 140).
7. Remove the air baffle (see Removing the air baffle on page 197).
8. Remove the fan cage assembly (see Removing the fan cage assembly on
page 228).
9. Note where the cables are connected to the system board; then, disconnect
them.
10. Remove any of the following components that are installed on the system
board and put them in a safe, static-protective place:
v Adapters (see Removing an adapter on page 199).
v Extender card (see Removing an extender card on page 266).
v DIMMs (see Removing a memory module on page 215).
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 281
v Microprocessors and heat sinks (see Removing a microprocessor and heat
sink on page 269).
v Battery (see Removing the battery on page 146).
v Hypervisor (see Removing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device on
page 219).
11. Rotate the release lever toward the front of the chassis.
12. Slide the system board toward the front of the server to disengage the tabs
from the chassis; then, grasp the handles and carefully lift the system board
out of the server.
13. If you are instructed to return the system board, follow all packaging
instructions, and use any packaging materials for shipping that are supplied to
you.
282 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Installing the system board
To install the system board, complete the following steps:
1. Touch the static-protective package that contains the system board to any
unpainted metal surface on the server; then, remove the system board from
the package.
2. Hold the system board by the handles and insert the system board into the
chassis at an angle; then, slide it toward the rear of the server.
Note: Make sure that none of the server cables are caught under the system
board.
3. Press down on the retention modules; then, rotate the release lever toward the
rear of the chassis to secure the system board.
4. Install any of the following components that you removed from the system
board:
v Microprocessors and heat sinks (see Installing a microprocessor and heat
sink on page 271).
v DIMMs (see Installing a memory module on page 216).
v Extender card (see Installing an extender card on page 268).
v Adapters (see Installing an adapter on page 200)
v Battery (see Installing the battery on page 147).
v Hypervisor (see Installing a USB embedded hypervisor flash device on
page 221).
5. Reconnect any cables to the system board that you disconnected during
removal (see System board internal connectors on page 15 and Internal
cable routing and connectors on page 149).
Chapter 5. Removing and replacing server components 283
6. Install the fan cage assembly (see Installing the fan cage assembly on page
229).
7. Install the air baffle (see Installing the air baffle on page 198).
8. Return the power-supply cage to its closed position (see Closing the
power-supply cage on page 142).
9. Install the power supplies (see Installing a hot-swap power supply on page
259).
10. Install and lock the left-side cover (see Installing the left-side cover on page
166).
11. Reconnect the external cables and power cords; then, turn on the attached
devices and turn on the server.
284 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions
The following configuration programs come with the server:
v Setup utility
The Setup utility (formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program) is part
of the IBM System x Server Firmware. Use it to change the startup-device
sequence, set the date and time, and set passwords. For information about using
this program, see Using the Setup utility on page 287.
v Boot Selection Menu program
The Boot Selection Menu program is part of the IBM System x Server Firmware.
Use it to override the startup sequence that is set in the Setup utility and
temporarily assign a device to be first in the startup sequence.
v IBM ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
The ServerGuide program provides software-setup tools and installation tools
that are designed for the server. Use this CD during the installation of the server
to configure basic hardware features, such as an integrated SAS adapter with
RAID capabilities, and to simplify the installation of your operating system. For
information about obtaining and using this CD, see Using the ServerGuide Setup
and Installation CD on page 292.
v Integrated management module
Use the integrated management module (IMM) for configuration, to update the
firmware and sensor data record/field replaceable unit (SDR/FRU) data, and to
remotely manage a network. For information about using the IMM, see Using the
integrated management module on page 295.
v VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor
The VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor is available on the server models that
come with an installed USB embedded hypervisor flash device. The USB flash
device is installed in the USB connector on the system board. Hypervisor is
virtualization software that enables multiple operating systems to run on a host
system at the same time. For more information about using the embedded
hypervisor, see Using the embedded hypervisor on page 296.
v Ethernet controller configuration
For information about configuring the Ethernet controller, see Configuring the
Gigabit Ethernet controller on page 299.
v LSI Configuration Utility
Use the LSI Configuration Utility to configure the integrated SAS/SATA adapter
with RAID capabilities and the devices that are attached to it. For information
about using this program, see Using the LSI Configuration Utility on page 299.
The following table lists the server configurations and the applications that are
available for configuring and managing RAID arrays.
Table 16. Server configuration and applications for configuring and managing RAID arrays
Server configuration
RAID array configuration
(before operating system is
installed)
RAID array management
(after operating system is
installed)
ServeRAID-BR10i adapter
(LSI 1068E)
LSI Utility (Setup utility, press
Ctrl+H), ServerGuide
CFGGEN configuration for
IBM and LSI basic and
integrated RAID adapters
IBM BladeCenter and System
x
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 285
Table 16. Server configuration and applications for configuring and managing RAID
arrays (continued)
Server configuration
RAID array configuration
(before operating system is
installed)
RAID array management
(after operating system is
installed)
ServeRAID-BR10il v2
adapter (LSI 1064E)
LSI Utility (Setup utility, press
Ctrl+H), ServerGuide
CFGGEN configuration for
IBM and LSI basic and
integrated RAID adapters
IBM BladeCenter and System
x
ServeRAID-MR10i adapter
(LSI 1078)
MegaRAID BIOS
Configuration Utility,
ServerGuide
MegaRAID Storage Manager
(MSM), Director
ServeRAID-M5014 adapter
(LSI SAS2108)
MegaRAID BIOS
Configuration Utility,
ServerGuide
MegaRAID Storage Manager
(MSM), Director
ServeRAID-M5015 adapter
(LSI SAS2108)
MegaRAID BIOS
Configuration Utility,
ServerGuide
MegaRAID Storage Manager
(MSM), Director
ServeRAID-M1015 adapter
(LSI SAS2008)
MegaRAID BIOS
Configuration Utility,
ServerGuide
MegaRAID Storage Manager
(MSM), Director
v IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program
Use this program as an alternative to the Setup utility for modifying UEFI settings
and IMM settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to modify UEFI
settings from the command line without the need to restart the server to access
the Setup utility. For more information about using this program, see IBM
Advanced Settings Utility on page 301.
Updating the firmware
Important: Some cluster solutions require specific code levels or coordinated code
updates. If the device is part of a cluster solution, verify that the latest level of code
is supported for the cluster solution before you update the code.
The firmware for the server is periodically updated and is available for download
from the Web. To check for the latest level of firmware, such as server firmware,
vital product data (VPD) code, device drivers, and service processor firmware
complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. Click System x3400 M3 to display the matrix of downloadable files for the
server.
Download the latest firmware for the server; then, install the firmware, using the
instructions that are included with the downloaded files.
286 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
When you replace a device in the server, you might have to either update the
firmware that is stored in memory on the device or restore the pre-existing firmware
from a diskette or CD image.
v IBM System x Server Firmware code is stored in ROM on the system board.
v IMM firmware is stored in ROM on the IMM on the system board.
v Ethernet firmware is stored in ROM on the Ethernet controller.
v ServeRAID firmware is stored in ROM on the ServeRAID adapter.
v SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the integrated SATA adapter.
v SAS/SATA firmware is stored in ROM on the SAS/SATA adapter on the system
board.
Using the Setup utility
Use the Setup utility, formerly called the Configuration/Setup Utility program, to
perform the following tasks:
v View configuration information
v View and change assignments for devices and I/O ports
v Set the date and time
v Set the startup characteristics of the server and the order of startup devices
v Set and change settings for advanced hardware features
v View, set, and change settings for power-management features
v View and clear error logs
v Resolve configuration conflicts
Starting the Setup utility
To start the Setup utility, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to AC power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select the settings to view or change.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
Setup utility menu choices
The following choices are on the Setup utility main menu. Depending on the version
of the firmware, some menu choices might differ slightly from these descriptions.
v System Information
Select this choice to view information about the server. When you make changes
through other choices in the Setup utility, some of those changes are reflected in
the system information; you cannot change settings directly in the system
information.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
System Summary
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 287
Select this choice to view configuration information, including the ID, speed,
and cache size of the microprocessors, machine type and model of the server,
the serial number, the system UUID, and the amount of installed memory.
When you make configuration changes through other choices in the Setup
utility, the changes are reflected in the system summary; you cannot change
settings directly in the system summary.
Product Data
Select this choice to view the system board identifier, the revision level or
issue date of the firmware, the integrated management module and
diagnostics code, and the version and date.
v System Settings
Select this choice to view or change the server component settings.
Processors
Select this choice to view or change the processor settings.
Memory
Select this choice to view or change the memory settings. To configure
memory mirroring, select System Settings Memory, and then select
Memory Channel Mode Mirroring.
Devices and I/O Ports
Select this choice to view or change assignments for devices and input/output
(I/O) ports. You can configure the serial ports; configure remote console
redirection; enable or disable integrated Ethernet controllers, the SAS/SATA
adapter, SATA optical drive channels, and PCI slots. If you disable a device, it
cannot be configured, and the operating system will not be able to detect it
(this is equivalent to disconnecting the device).
Power
Select this choice to view or change power capping to control consumption,
processors, and performance states.
Legacy Support
Select this choice to view or set legacy support.
- Force Legacy Video on Boot
Select this choice to force INT video support, if the operating system does
not support UEFI video output standards.
- Rehook INT 19h
Select this choice to enable or disable devices from taking control of the
boot process. The default is Disable.
- Legacy Thunk Support
Select this choice to enable or disable the UEFI to interact with PCI mass
storage devices that are not UEFI-compliant.
Integrated Management Module
Select this choice to view or change the settings for the integrated
management module.
- POST Watchdog Timer
Select this choice to view or enable the POST watchdog timer.
- POST Watchdog Timer Value
Select this choice to view or set the POST loader watchdog timer value.
- Reboot System on NMI
Enable or disable restarting the system whenever a nonmaskable interrupt
(NMI) occurs. Enabled is the default.
288 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
- Commands on USB Interface Preference
Select this choice to enable or disable the Ethernet over USB interface on
IMM.
- Network Configuration
Select this choice to view the system management network interface port,
the IMM MAC address, the current IMM IP address, and host name; define
the static IMM IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address; specify
whether to use the static IP address or have DHCP assign the IMM IP
address; and save the network changes.
- Reset IMM to Defaults
Select this choice to view or reset IMM to the default settings.
Adapters and UEFI Drivers
Select this choice to view information about the adapters and drivers in the
server that are compliant with EFI 1.10 and UEFI 2.0.
v Network
Select this choice to view or configure the network options, such as the iSCSI,
PXE, and network devices. There might be additional configuration choices for
optional network devices that are compliant with UEFI 2.1 and later.
v Date and Time
Select this choice to set the date and time in the server, in 24-hour format
(hour:minute:second).
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Start Options
Select this choice to view the startup sequence or boot to devices. The server
starts from the first boot record that it finds.
This choice is on the full Setup utility menu only.
v Boot Manager
Select this choice to view, add, or change the device boot priority, boot from a
file, select a one-time boot, or reset the boot order to the default setting.
If the server has Wake on LAN hardware and software and the operating system
supports Wake on LAN functions, you can specify a startup sequence for the
Wake on LAN functions. For example, you can define a startup sequence that
checks for a disc in the CD-RW/DVD drive, then checks the hard disk drive, and
then checks a network adapter.
v System Event Logs
Select this choice to view the system-event log and the POST event log. For
more information about these logs, see Event logs on page 23.
Important: If the system-error LED on the front of the server is lit but there are
no other error indications, clear the system-event log. Also, after you complete a
repair or correct an error, clear the system-event log to turn off the system-error
LED on the front of the server.
POST Event Viewer
Select this choice to enter the POST event viewer to view the error messages
in the POST event log.
System Event Log
Select this choice to view the error messages in the system-event log.
Clear System Event Log
Select this choice to clear the system-event log.
v User Security
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 289
Select this choice to set, change, or clear passwords. See Passwords for more
information.
This choice is on the full and limited Setup utility menu.
Set Power-on Password
Select this choice to set or change a power-on password. For more
information, see Power-on password on page 291.
Clear Power-on Password
Select this choice to clear a power-on password. For more information, see
Power-on password on page 291.
Set Administrator Password
Select this choice to set or change an administrator password. An
administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If an administrator password is set,
the full Setup utility menu is available only if you type the administrator
password at the password prompt. For more information, see Administrator
password on page 291.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is
no way to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
Clear Administrator Password
Select this choice to clear an administrator password. For more information,
see Administrator password on page 291.
v Save Settings
Select this choice to save the changes that you have made in the settings.
v Restore Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the previous settings.
v Load Default Settings
Select this choice to cancel the changes that you have made in the settings and
restore the factory settings.
v Exit Setup
Select this choice to exit from the Setup utility. If you have not saved the
changes that you have made in the settings, you are asked whether you want to
save the changes or exit without saving them.
Passwords
From the User Security menu choice, you can set, change, and delete a power-on
password and an administrator password. The User Security choice is on the full
Setup utility menu only.
If you set only a power-on password, you must type the power-on password to
complete the system startup and to have access to the full Setup utility menu.
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If you set only an administrator
password, you do not have to type a password to complete the system startup, but
you must type the administrator password to access the Setup utility menu.
If you set a power-on password for a user and an administrator password for a
system administrator, you can type either password to complete the system startup.
A system administrator who types the administrator password has access to the full
Setup utility menu; the system administrator can give the user authority to set,
290 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
change, and delete the power-on password. A user who types the power-on
password has access to only the limited Setup utility menu; the user can set,
change, and delete the power-on password, if the system administrator has given
the user that authority.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
Power-on password
If a power-on password is set, when you turn on the server, the system startup will
not be completed until you type the power-on password. You can use any
combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the password.
If you forget the power-on password, you can regain access to the server in any of
the following ways:
v If an administrator password is set, type the administrator password at the
password prompt. Start the Setup utility and reset the power-on password.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no
way to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
v Change the position of the power-on password switch (enable switch 2 of the
system board switch block (SW6)) to bypass the power-on password check.
Attention: Before you change any switch settings or moving any jumpers, turn
off the server; then, disconnect all power cords and external cables. See the
safety information that begins on page Safety on page vii. Do not change
settings or move jumpers on any system board switch or jumper blocks that are
not shown in this document.
While the server is turned off, move switch 2 of the switch block (SW6) to the On
position to enable the power-on password override. You can then start the server,
run the Setup utility, and reset the power-on password. You do not have to return
the switch to the previous position.
The power-on password override switch does not affect the administrator
password.
Administrator password
An administrator password is intended to be used by a system administrator; it
limits access to the full Setup utility menu. If an administrator password is set, you
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 291
must type the administrator password for access to the full Setup utility menu. You
can use any combination of up to seven characters (A - Z, a - z, and 0 - 9) for the
password.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
Using the Boot Selection Menu program
The Boot Selection Menu program is used to temporarily redefine the first startup
device without changing boot options or settings in the Setup utility.
To use the Boot Selection Menu program, complete the following steps:
1. Turn off the server.
2. Restart the server.
3. Press F12 (Select Boot Device). If a bootable USB mass storage device is
installed, a submenu item (USB Key/Disk) is displayed.
4. Use the Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys to select an item from the Boot
Selection Menu and press Enter.
The next time the server starts, it returns to the startup sequence that is set in the
Setup utility.
Starting the backup server firmware
The system board contains a backup copy area for the IBM System x Server
Firmware (server firmware). This is a secondary copy of server firmware that you
update only during the process of updating server firmware. If the primary copy of
the server firmware becomes damaged, use this backup copy.
To force the server to start from the backup copy, turn off the server; then, place the
UEFI boot recovery jumper (JP6) in the backup position (pins 2 and 3).
Use the backup copy of the server firmware until the primary copy is restored. After
the primary copy is restored, turn off the server; then, move the UEFI boot recovery
JP6 jumper back to the primary position (pins 1 and 2).
Using the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD
The ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD contains a setup and installation
program that is designed for your server. The ServerGuide program detects the
server model and optional hardware devices that are installed and uses that
information during setup to configure the hardware. The ServerGuide program
simplifies operating-system installations by providing updated device drivers and, in
some cases, installing them automatically.
You can download a free image of the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD or
purchase the CD from the ServerGuide fulfillment Web site at http://www.ibm.com/
systems/management/serverguide/sub.html. To download the free image, click IBM
Service and Support Site.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
The ServerGuide program has the following features:
292 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
v An easy-to-use interface
v Diskette-free setup, and configuration programs that are based on detected
hardware
v ServeRAID Manager program, which configures your ServeRAID adapter or
integrated SCSI controller with RAID capabilities
v Device drivers that are provided for the server model and detected hardware
v Operating-system partition size and file-system type that are selectable during
setup
ServerGuide features
Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the ServerGuide
program. To learn more about the version that you have, start the ServerGuide
Setup and Installation CD and view the online overview. Not all features are
supported on all server models.
The ServerGuide program requires a supported IBM server with an enabled
startable (bootable) CD drive. In addition to the ServerGuide Setup and Installation
CD, you must have your operating-system CD to install the operating system.
The ServerGuide program performs the following tasks:
v Sets system date and time
v Detects the RAID adapter or controller and runs the SAS RAID configuration
program (with LSI chip sets for ServeRAID adapters only)
v Checks the microcode (firmware) levels of a ServeRAID adapter and determines
whether a later level is available from the CD
v Detects installed optional hardware devices and provides updated device drivers
for most adapters and devices
v Provides diskette-free installation for supported Windows operating systems
v Includes an online readme file with links to tips for hardware and
operating-system installation
Setup and configuration overview
When you use the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, you do not need setup
diskettes. You can use the CD to configure any supported IBM server model. The
setup program provides a list of tasks that are required to set up your server model.
On a server with a ServeRAID adapter or integrated SCSI controller with RAID
capabilities, you can run the SCSI RAID configuration program to create logical
drives.
Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
When you start the ServerGuide Setup and Installation CD, the program prompts
you to complete the following tasks:
v Select your language.
v Select your keyboard layout and country.
v View the overview to learn about ServerGuide features.
v View the readme file to review installation tips for your operating system and
adapter.
v Start the operating-system installation. You will need your operating-system CD.
Important: Before you install a legacy operating system (such as VMware) on a
server with an LSI SAS controller, you must first complete the following steps:
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 293
1. Update the device driver for the LSI SAS controller to the latest level.
2. In the Setup utility, set Legacy Only as the first option in the boot sequence in
the Boot Manager menu.
3. Using the LSI Configuration Utility program, select a boot drive.
For detailed information and instructions, go to https://www-947.ibm.com/systems/
support/supportsite.wss/docdisplay?lndocid=MIGR-5083225.
Typical operating-system installation
The ServerGuide program can reduce the time it takes to install an operating
system. It provides the device drivers that are required for your hardware and for
the operating system that you are installing. This section describes a typical
ServerGuide operating-system installation.
Note: Features and functions can vary slightly with different versions of the
ServerGuide program.
1. After you have completed the setup process, the operating-system installation
program starts. (You will need your operating-system CD to complete the
installation.)
2. The ServerGuide program stores information about the server model, service
processor, hard disk drive adapters, and network adapters. Then, the program
checks the CD for newer device drivers. This information is stored and then
passed to the operating-system installation program.
3. The ServerGuide program presents operating-system partition options that are
based on your operating-system selection and the installed hard disk drives.
4. The ServerGuide program prompts you to insert your operating-system CD and
restart the server. At this point, the installation program for the operating system
takes control to complete the installation.
Installing your operating system without using ServerGuide
If you have already configured the server hardware and you are not using the
ServerGuide program to install your operating system, complete the following steps
to download the latest operating-system installation instructions from the IBM Web
site.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. From the menu on the left side of the page, click System x support search.
4. From the Task menu, select Install.
5. From the Product family menu, select System x3400 M3.
6. From the Operating system menu, select your operating system, and then click
Search to display the available installation documents.
Changing the Power Policy option to the default settings after loading
UEFI defaults
The default settings for the Power Policy option are set by the IMM. To change the
Power Policy option to the default settings, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
294 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to AC power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select System Settings Integrated Management Module Reset IMM to
Defaults.
4. Wait several minutes while IMM initializes all of the default values.
5. Go back and check the Power Policy setting to verify that it is set to Restore
(the default).
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
Using the integrated management module
The integrated management module (IMM) is a second generation of the functions
that were formerly provided by the baseboard management controller hardware. It
combines service processor functions, video controller, and (when an optional
virtual media key is installed) remote presence function in a single chip.
The IMM supports the following basic systems-management features:
v Active Energy Manager.
v Alerts (in-band and out-of-band alerting, PET traps - IPMI style, SNMP, e-mail).
v Auto Boot Failure Recovery.
v A virtual media key, which enables remote presence support (remote video,
remote keyboard/mouse, and remote storage).
v Automatic Server Restart (ASR) when POST is not complete or the operating
system hangs and the OS watchdog timer times out. The IMM might be
configured to watch for the OS watchdog timer and restart the server after a
timeout, if the ASR feature is enabled. Otherwise, the system administrator can
generate an NMI by pressing an NMI button on the system board for an
operating-system memory dump. ASR is supported by IPMI.
v Boot sequence manipulation.
v Command-line interface.
v Configuration save and restore.
v DIMM error assistance. The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
disables a failing DIMM that is detected during POST, and the IMM lights the
associated system-error LED and the failing DIMM error LED.
v Environmental monitor with fan speed control for temperature, voltages, fan
failure, and power supply failure.
v Intelligent Platform Management Interface (IPMI) Specification V2.0 and
Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB) support.
v Invalid system configuration (CNFG) LED support.
v Light path diagnostics LEDs to report errors that occur with fans, power supplies,
microprocessor, hard disk drives, and system errors.
v NMI detection and reporting.
v Operating-system failure blue screen capture.
v PCI configuration data.
v PECI 2 support.
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 295
v Power/reset control (power-on, hard and soft shutdown, hard and soft reset,
schedule power control).
v Query power-supply input power.
v ROM-based IMM firmware flash updates.
v Serial redirect.
v Serial over LAN (SOL).
v System-event log.
v When one of the two microprocessors reports an internal error, the server
disables the defective microprocessor and restarts with the one good
microprocessor.
The IMM also provides the following remote server management capabilities
through the OSA SMBridge management utility program:
v Command-line interface (IPMI Shell)
The command-line interface provides direct access to server management
functions through the IPMI 2.0 protocol. Use the command-line interface to issue
commands to control the server power, view system information, and identify the
server. You can also save one or more commands as a text file and run the file
as a script.
v Serial over LAN
Establish a Serial over LAN (SOL) connection to manage servers from a remote
location. You can remotely view and change the UEFI settings, restart the server,
identify the server, and perform other management functions. Any standard Telnet
client application can access the SOL connection.
Using the embedded hypervisor
The VMware ESXi embedded hypervisor is available on server models that come
with an installed USB embedded hypervisor flash device. The USB flash device
comes installed in the USB connector on the system board. Hypervisor is
virtualization software that enables multiple operating systems to run on a host
system at the same time. The USB flash device is required to activate the
hypervisor functions.
To start using the embedded hypervisor functions, you must add the USB flash
device to the boot order in the Setup utility.
To add the USB flash device to the boot order, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to AC power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select Boot Manager.
4. Select Add Boot Option; then, select Embedded Hypervisor. Press Enter, and
then select Esc.
5. Select Change Boot Order and then select Commit Changes; then, press
Enter.
6. Select Save Settings and then select Exit Setup.
296 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
If the embedded hypervisor flash device image becomes corrupt, you can use the
VMware Recovery CD that comes with the system to recover the flash device
image. To recover the flash device image, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to AC power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. Insert the VMware Recovery CD into the DVD drive.
3. Follow the instructions on the screen.
For additional information and instructions, see the VMware ESXi Server 3i
Embedded Setup Guide
Using the remote presence capability and blue-screen capture
The remote presence and blue-screen capture features are integrated functions of
the integrated management module (IMM). When the optional IBM Virtual Media
Key is installed in the server, it activates the remote presence functions. The virtual
media key is required to enable the integrated remote presence and blue-screen
capture features. Without the virtual media key, you will not be able to access the
network remotely to mount or unmount drives or images on the client system.
However, you can still access the Web interface without the key.
After the virtual media key is installed in the server, it is authenticated to determine
whether it is valid. If the key is not valid, you receive a message from the Web
interface (when you attempt to start the remote presence feature) indicating that the
hardware key is required to use the remote presence feature.
The virtual media key has an LED. When this LED is lit and green, it indicates that
the key is installed and functioning correctly. When the LED is not lit, it indicates
that the key might not be installed correctly.
The remote presence feature provides the following functions:
v Remotely viewing video with graphics resolutions up to 1600 x 1200 at 85 Hz,
regardless of the system state
v Remotely accessing the server, using the keyboard and mouse from a remote
client
v Mapping the CD or DVD drive, diskette drive, and USB flash drive on a remote
client, and mapping ISO and diskette image files as virtual drives that are
available for use by the server
v Uploading a diskette image to the IMM memory and mapping it to the server as a
virtual drive
The blue-screen capture feature captures the video display contents before the IMM
restarts the server when the IMM detects an operating-system hang condition. A
system administrator can use the blue-screen capture to assist in determining the
cause of the hang condition.
Enabling the remote presence feature
To enable the remote presence feature, complete the following steps:
1. Install the virtual media key into the dedicated slot on the system board (see
Internal cable routing and connectors on page 149).
2. Turn on the server.
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 297
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to AC power, the
power-control button becomes active.
Obtaining the IP address for the Web interface access
To access the Web interface and use the remote presence feature, you need the IP
address for the IMM. You can obtain the IMM IP address through the Setup utility.
To locate the IP address, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to AC power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set both a
power-on password and an administrator password, you must type the
administrator password to access the full Setup utility menu.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no
way to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
3. From the Setup utility main menu, select System Settings.
4. On the next screen, select Integrated Management Module.
5. On the next screen, select Network Configuration.
6. Find the IP address and write it down.
7. Exit from the Setup utility.
Logging on to the Web interface
To log onto the Web interface to use the remote presence functions, complete the
following steps:
1. Open a Web browser on a computer that connects to the server and in the
address or URL field, type the IP address or host name of the IMM to which
you want to connect.
Notes:
a. If you are logging on to the IMM for the first time after installation, the IMM
defaults to DHCP. If a DHCP host is not available, the IMM uses the default
static IP address 192.168.70.125.
b. You can obtain the DHCP-assigned IP address or the static IP address from
the server UEFI or from your network administrator.
The Login page is displayed.
2. On the Login page, type the user name and password. If you are using the IMM
for the first time, you can obtain the user name and password from your system
administrator. All login attempts are documented in the event log.
Note: The IMM is set initially with a user name of USERID and password of
PASSW0RD (passw0rd with a zero, not the letter O). You have read/write
access. You must change the default password the first time you log on.
3. On the Welcome page, type a timeout value (in minutes) in the field that is
provided. The IMM will log you off of the Web interface if your browser is
inactive for the number of minutes that you entered for the timeout value.
4. Click Continue to start the session. The System Health page provides a quick
view of the system status.
298 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Enabling the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility
The Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility is part of the server firmware. You can use it
to configure the network as a startable device, and you can customize where the
network startup option appears in the startup sequence. Enable and disable the
Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility from the Setup utility.
To enable the Broadcom Gigabit Ethernet Utility, complete the following steps:
1. From the Setup utility main menu, select Devices and I/O Ports and press
Enter.
2. Select Enable/Disable onboard device(s) and press Enter.
3. Select Ethernet and press Enter.
4. Select Enable and press Enter.
5. Exit to main menu and select Save Settings.
Configuring the Gigabit Ethernet controller
The Ethernet controllers are integrated on the system board. They provide an
interface for connecting to a 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, or 1 Gbps network and provide
full-duplex (FDX) capability, which enables simultaneous transmission and reception
of data on the network. If the Ethernet ports in the server support auto-negotiation,
the controllers detect the data-transfer rate (10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, or
1000BASE-T) and duplex mode (full-duplex or half-duplex) of the network and
automatically operate at that rate and mode.
You do not have to set any jumpers or configure the controllers. However, you must
install a device driver to enable the operating system to address the controllers. To
find updated information about configuring the controllers, complete the following
steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
2. Under Product support, click System x.
3. Under Popular links, click Software and device drivers.
4. From the Product family menu, select System x3400 M3 and click Go.
Using the LSI Configuration Utility
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage redundant array
of independent disks (RAID) arrays. Be sure to use this program as described in
this document.
Use the LSI Configuration Utility program to perform the following tasks:
v Perform a low-level format on a hard disk drive
v Create an array of hard disk drives with or without a hot-spare drive
v Set protocol parameters on hard disk drives
The integrated SAS/SATA adapter with RAID capabilities supports RAID arrays. You
can use the LSI Configuration Utility to configure RAID 1 (IM), RAID 1E (IME), and
RAID 0 (IS) for a single pair of attached devices. If you install a different type of
RAID adapter, follow the instructions in the documentation that comes with the
adapter to view or change settings for attached devices.
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 299
In addition, you can download an LSI command-line configuration program from
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
When you are using the LSI Configuration Utility program to configure and manage
arrays, consider the following information:
v The integrated SAS/SATA adapter with RAID capabilities supports the following
features:
Integrated Mirroring (IM) with hot-spare support (also known as RAID 1)
Use this option to create an integrated array of two disks. All data on the
primary disk can be migrated.
Integrated Mirroring Enhanced (IME) with hot-spare support (also known as
RAID 1E)
Use this option to create an integrated mirror enhanced array of three to eight
disks. All data on the array disks will be deleted.
Integrated Striping (IS) (also known as RAID 0)
Use this option to create an integrated striping array of two to eight disks. All
data on the array disks will be deleted.
v Hard disk drive capacities affect how you create arrays. The drives in an array
can have different capacities, but the RAID adapter treats them as if they all
have the capacity of the smallest hard disk drive.
v If you use an integrated SAS/SATA adapter with RAID capabilities to configure a
RAID 1 (mirrored) array after you have installed the operating system, you will
lose access to any data or applications that were previously stored on the
secondary drive of the mirrored pair.
v If you install a different type of RAID adapter, see the documentation that comes
with the adapter for information about viewing and changing settings for attached
devices.
Starting the LSI Configuration Utility program
To start the LSI Configuration Utility, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the server.
Note: Approximately 20 seconds after the server is connected to AC power, the
power-control button becomes active.
2. When the prompt <F1> Setup is displayed, press F1. If you have set an
administrator password, you must type the administrator password to access the
full Setup utility menu. If you do not type the administrator password, a limited
Setup utility menu is available.
3. Select System Settings Adapters and UEFI drivers.
4. Select Please refresh this page first and press Enter.
5. To perform storage-management tasks, see the SAS adapter documentation,
which you can download from the disk adapter and RAID software matrix:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, click System x.
c. Under Popular links, click Storage Support Matrix.
Attention: If you set an administrator password and then forget it, there is no way
to change, override, or remove it. You must replace the system board.
When you have finished changing settings, press Esc to exit from the program;
select Save to save the settings that you have changed.
300 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Formatting a hard disk drive
Low-level formatting removes all data from the hard disk. If there is data on the disk
that you want to save, back up the hard disk before you perform this procedure.
Note: Before you format a hard disk, make sure that the disk is not part of a
mirrored pair.
To format a drive, complete the following steps:
1. From the list of adapters, select the adapter (channel) for the drive that you
want to format and press Enter.
2. Select SAS Topology and press Enter.
3. Select Direct Attach Devices and press Enter.
4. To highlight the drive that you want to format, use the Up Arrow and Down
Arrow keys. To scroll left and right, use the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys or
the End key. Press Alt+D.
5. To start the low-level formatting operation, select Format and press Enter.
Creating a RAID array of hard disk drives
To create a RAID array of hard disk drives, complete the following steps:
1. From the list of adapters, select the adapter (channel) for which you want to
create an array.
2. Select RAID Properties.
3. Select the type of array that you want to create.
4. In the RAID Disk column, use the Spacebar or Minus (-) key to select Yes
(select) or No (deselect) to select or deselect a drive from a RAID disk.
5. Continue to select drives, using the Spacebar or Minus (-) key, until you have
selected all the drives for your array.
6. Press C to create the disk array.
7. Select Save changes then exit this menu to create the array.
8. Exit the Setup utility.
IBM Advanced Settings Utility
The IBM Advanced Settings Utility (ASU) program is an alternative to the Setup
utility for modifying UEFI settings. Use the ASU program online or out-of-band to
modify UEFI settings from the command line without the need to restart the server
to access the Setup utility.
You can also use the ASU program to configure the optional remote presence
features or other IMM settings. The remote presence features provide enhanced
systems-management capabilities.
In addition, the ASU program provides limited settings for configuring the IPMI
function in the IMM through the command-line interface.
Use the command-line interface to issue setup commands. You can save any of the
settings as a file and run the file as a script. The ASU program supports scripting
environments through a batch-processing mode.
For more information and to download the ASU program, go to
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 301
Updating IBM Systems Director
If you plan to use IBM Systems Director to manage the server, you must check for
the latest applicable IBM Systems Director updates and interim fixes.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
To locate and install a newer version of IBM Systems Director, complete the
following steps:
1. Check for the latest version of IBM Systems Director:
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/management/director/downloads.html.
b. If a newer version of IBM Systems Director than what comes with the server
is shown in the drop-down list, follow the instructions on the Web page to
download the latest version.
2. Install the IBM Systems Director program.
If your management server is connected to the Internet, to locate and install
updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On the Welcome page of the IBM Systems Director Web interface, click View
updates.
3. Click Check for updates. The available updates are displayed in a table.
4. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.
If your management server is not connected to the Internet, to locate and install
updates and interim fixes, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that you have run the Discovery and Inventory collection tasks.
2. On a system that is connected to the Internet, go to http://www.ibm.com/
eserver/support/fixes/fixcentral/.
3. From the Product family list, select IBM Systems Director.
4. From the Product list, select IBM Systems Director.
5. From the Installed version list, select the latest version, and click Continue.
6. Download the available updates.
7. Copy the downloaded files to the management server.
8. On the management server, on the Welcome page of the IBM Systems
Director Web interface, click the Manage tab, and click Update Manager.
9. Click Import updates and specify the location of the downloaded files that you
copied to the management server.
10. Return to the Welcome page of the Web interface, and click View updates.
11. Select the updates that you want to install, and click Install to start the
installation wizard.
302 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Updating the Universal Unique Identifier (UUID)
The Universal Unique Identifier (UUID) must be updated when the system board is
replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the UUID in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the UUID,
complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
2. ASU sets the UUID in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the UUID:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)
Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, use the following command syntax to set the UUID:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> [access_method]
Where:
<uuid_value>
Up to 16-byte hexadecimal value assigned by you.
[access_method]
The access method that you selected to use from the following
methods:
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 303
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:
Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --user <user_id>
--password <password>
Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.
Example:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value>
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
See the Advanced Settings Utility Users Guide for more details. You can
access the ASU Users Guide from the IBM Web site.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual
procedure might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand
the list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced
Settings Utility link.
v Remote LAN access, type the command:
304 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:
Example that does not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
--user <user_id> --password <password>
Example that does use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoUUID <uuid_value> --host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.
Updating the DMI/SMBIOS data
The Desktop Management Interface (DMI) must be updated when the system board
is replaced. Use the Advanced Settings Utility to update the DMI in the UEFI-based
server. The ASU is an online tool that supports several operating systems. Make
sure that you download the version for your operating system. You can download
the ASU from the IBM Web site. To download the ASU and update the DMI,
complete the following steps.
Note: Changes are made periodically to the IBM Web site. The actual procedure
might vary slightly from what is described in this document.
1. Download the Advanced Settings Utility (ASU):
a. Go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
b. Under Product support, select System x.
c. Under Popular links, select Tools and utilities.
d. In the left pane, click System x and BladeCenter Tools Center.
e. Scroll down and click Tools reference.
f. Scroll down and click the plus-sign (+) for Configuration tools to expand the
list; then, select Advanced Settings Utility (ASU).
g. In the next window under Related Information, click the Advanced Settings
Utility link and download the ASU version for your operating system.
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 305
2. ASU sets the DMI in the Integrated Management Module (IMM). Select one of
the following methods to access the Integrated Management Module (IMM) to
set the DMI:
v Online from the target system (LAN or keyboard console style (KCS) access)
v Remote access to the target system (LAN based)
v Bootable media containing ASU (LAN or KCS, depending upon the bootable
media)
Note: IBM provides a method for building a bootable media. You can create
a bootable media using the Bootable Media Creator (BoMC) application from
the Tools Center Web site.
3. Copy and unpack the ASU package, which also includes other required files, to
the server. Make sure that you unpack the ASU and the required files to the
same directory. In addition to the application executable (asu or asu64), the
following files are required:
v For Windows based operating systems:
ibm_rndis_server_os.inf
device.cat
v For Linux based operating systems:
cdc_interface.sh
4. After you install ASU, Type the following commands to set the DMI:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> [access_method]
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> [access_method]
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag> [access_method]
Where:
<m/t_model>
The server machine type and model number. Type mtm xxxxyyy, where
xxxx is the machine type and yyy is the server model number.
<s/n> The serial number on the server. Type sn zzzzzzz, where zzzzzzz is the
serial number.
<asset_method>
The server asset tag number. Type asset
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa, where
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa is the asset tag number.
[access_method]
The access method that you select to use from the following methods:
v Online authenticated LAN access, type the command:
[host <imm_internal_ip>] [user <imm_user_id>][password
<imm_password>]
Where:
imm_internal_ip
The IMM internal LAN/USB IP address. The default value is
169.254.95.118.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
306 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Note: If you do not specify any of these parameters, ASU will use the default
values. When the default values are used and ASU is unable to access the
IMM using the online authenticated LAN access method, ASU will
automatically use the following unauthenticated KCS access method.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --user <imm_user_id>
--password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
Examples that do use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Online KCS access (unauthenticated and user restricted):
You do not need to specify a value for access_method when you use this
access method.
The KCS access method uses the IPMI/KCS interface. This method requires
that the IPMI driver be installed. Some operating systems have the IPMI
driver installed by default. ASU provides the corresponding mapping layer.
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
v Remote LAN access, type the command:
Note: When using the remote LAN access method to access IMM using the
LAN from a client, the host and the imm_external_ip address are required
parameters.
host <imm_external_ip> [user <imm_user_id>][password <imm_password>]
Where:
imm_external_ip
The external IMM LAN IP address. There is no default value. This
parameter is required.
imm_user_id
The IMM account (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is USERID.
imm_password
The IMM account password (1 of 12 accounts). The default value is
PASSW0RD (with a zero 0 not an O).
The following commands are examples of using the userid and password
default values and not using the default values:
Examples that do not use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
Chapter 6. Configuration information and instructions 307
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
--user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SYsEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip> --user <imm_user_id> --password <imm_password>
Examples that do use the userid and password default values:
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoProdName <m/t_model> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysInfoSerialNum <s/n> --host <imm_ip>
asu set SYSTEM_PROD_DATA.SysEncloseAssetTag <asset_tag>
--host <imm_ip>
v Bootable media:
You can also build a bootable media using the applications available through
the Tools Center Web site at http://publib.boulder.ibm.com/infocenter/toolsctr/
v1r0/index.jsp. From the left pane, click IBM System x and BladeCenter
Tools Center, then click Tool reference for the available tools.
5. Restart the server.
308 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix A. Getting help and technical assistance
If you need help, service, or technical assistance or just want more information
about IBM products, you will find a wide variety of sources available from IBM to
assist you. This section contains information about where to go for additional
information about IBM and IBM products, what to do if you experience a problem
with your system, and whom to call for service, if it is necessary.
Before you call
Before you call, make sure that you have taken these steps to try to solve the
problem yourself:
v Check all cables to make sure that they are connected.
v Check the power switches to make sure that the system and any optional
devices are turned on.
v Use the troubleshooting information in your system documentation, and use the
diagnostic tools that come with your system. Information about diagnostic tools is
in the Problem Determination and Service Guide on the IBM Documentation CD
that comes with your system.
v Go to the IBM support Web site at http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ to check
for technical information, hints, tips, and new device drivers or to submit a
request for information.
You can solve many problems without outside assistance by following the
troubleshooting procedures that IBM provides in the online help or in the
documentation that is provided with your IBM product. The documentation that
comes with IBM systems also describes the diagnostic tests that you can perform.
Most systems, operating systems, and programs come with documentation that
contains troubleshooting procedures and explanations of error messages and error
codes. If you suspect a software problem, see the documentation for the operating
system or program.
Using the documentation
Information about your IBM system and preinstalled software, if any, or optional
device is available in the documentation that comes with the product. That
documentation can include printed documents, online documents, readme files, and
help files. See the troubleshooting information in your system documentation for
instructions for using the diagnostic programs. The troubleshooting information or
the diagnostic programs might tell you that you need additional or updated device
drivers or other software. IBM maintains pages on the World Wide Web where you
can get the latest technical information and download device drivers and updates.
To access these pages, go to http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/ and follow the
instructions. Also, some documents are available through the IBM Publications
Center at http://www.ibm.com/shop/publications/order/.
Getting help and information from the World Wide Web
On the World Wide Web, the IBM Web site has up-to-date information about IBM
systems, optional devices, services, and support. The address for IBM System x

and xSeries

information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/x/. The address for IBM


BladeCenter

information is http://www.ibm.com/systems/bladecenter/. The address


for IBM IntelliStation

information is http://www.ibm.com/intellistation/.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 309
You can find service information for IBM systems and optional devices at
http://www.ibm.com/systems/support/.
Software service and support
Through IBM Support Line, you can get telephone assistance, for a fee, with usage,
configuration, and software problems with System x and xSeries servers,
BladeCenter products, IntelliStation workstations, and appliances. For information
about which products are supported by Support Line in your country or region, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/sl/products/.
For more information about Support Line and other IBM services, see
http://www.ibm.com/services/, or see http://www.ibm.com/planetwide/ for support
telephone numbers. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV
(1-800-426-7378).
Hardware service and support
You can receive hardware service through your IBM reseller or IBM Services. To
locate a reseller authorized by IBM to provide warranty service, go to
http://www.ibm.com/partnerworld/ and click Find a Business Partner on the right
side of the page. For IBM support telephone numbers, see http://www.ibm.com/
planetwide/. In the U.S. and Canada, call 1-800-IBM-SERV (1-800-426-7378).
In the U.S. and Canada, hardware service and support is available 24 hours a day,
7 days a week. In the U.K., these services are available Monday through Friday,
from 9 a.m. to 6 p.m.
IBM Taiwan product service
IBM Taiwan product service contact information:
IBM Taiwan Corporation
3F, No 7, Song Ren Rd.
Taipei, Taiwan
Telephone: 0800-016-888
310 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Appendix B. Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.
IBM may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this document in
other countries. Consult your local IBM representative for information on the
products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to an IBM
product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that IBM
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,
program, or service that does not infringe any IBM intellectual property right may be
used instead. However, it is the user's responsibility to evaluate and verify the
operation of any non-IBM product, program, or service.
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter
described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any
license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to:
IBM Director of Licensing
IBM Corporation
North Castle Drive
Armonk, NY 10504-1785
U.S.A.
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS
PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or
implied warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be
incorporated in new editions of the publication. IBM may make improvements and/or
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any
time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-IBM Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those
Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this
IBM product, and use of those Web sites is at your own risk.
IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes
appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.
Trademarks
IBM, the IBM logo, and ibm.com are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corp., registered in many jurisdictions worldwide. Other product and service names
might be trademarks of IBM or other companies. A current list of IBM trademarks is
available on the web at Copyright and trademark information at
http://www.ibm.com/legal/copytrade.shtml.
Adobe and PostScript are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe
Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 311
Cell Broadband Engine is a trademark of Sony Computer Entertainment, Inc., in the
United States, other countries, or both and is used under license therefrom.
Intel, Intel Xeon, Itanium, and Pentium are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries.
Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States, other
countries, or both.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in
the United States, other countries, or both.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other
countries.
Important notes
Processor speed indicates the internal clock speed of the microprocessor; other
factors also affect application performance.
CD or DVD drive speed is the variable read rate. Actual speeds vary and are often
less than the possible maximum.
When referring to processor storage, real and virtual storage, or channel volume,
KB stands for 1024 bytes, MB stands for 1 048 576 bytes, and GB stands for
1 073 741 824 bytes.
When referring to hard disk drive capacity or communications volume, MB stands
for 1 000 000 bytes, and GB stands for 1 000 000 000 bytes. Total user-accessible
capacity can vary depending on operating environments.
Maximum internal hard disk drive capacities assume the replacement of any
standard hard disk drives and population of all hard disk drive bays with the largest
currently supported drives that are available from IBM.
Maximum memory might require replacement of the standard memory with an
optional memory module.
IBM makes no representation or warranties regarding non-IBM products and
services that are ServerProven

, including but not limited to the implied warranties


of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. These products are offered
and warranted solely by third parties.
IBM makes no representations or warranties with respect to non-IBM products.
Support (if any) for the non-IBM products is provided by the third party, not IBM.
Some software might differ from its retail version (if available) and might not include
user manuals or all program functionality.
312 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Particulate contamination
Attention: Airborne particulates (including metal flakes or particles) and reactive
gases acting alone or in combination with other environmental factors such as
humidity or temperature might pose a risk to the server that is described in this
document. Risks that are posed by the presence of excessive particulate levels or
concentrations of harmful gases include damage that might cause the server to
malfunction or cease functioning altogether. This specification sets forth limits for
particulates and gases that are intended to avoid such damage. The limits must not
be viewed or used as definitive limits, because numerous other factors, such as
temperature or moisture content of the air, can influence the impact of particulates
or environmental corrosives and gaseous contaminant transfer. In the absence of
specific limits that are set forth in this document, you must implement practices that
maintain particulate and gas levels that are consistent with the protection of human
health and safety. If IBM determines that the levels of particulates or gases in your
environment have caused damage to the server, IBM may condition provision of
repair or replacement of server or parts on implementation of appropriate remedial
measures to mitigate such environmental contamination. Implementation of such
remedial measures is a customer responsibility.
Table 17. Limits for particulates and gases
Contaminant Limits
Particulate v The room air must be continuously filtered with 40% atmospheric dust
spot efficiency (MERV 9) according to ASHRAE Standard 52.2
1
.
v Air that enters a data center must be filtered to 99.97% efficiency or
greater, using high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filters that meet
MIL-STD-282.
v The deliquescent relative humidity of the particulate contamination
must be more than 60%
2
.
v The room must be free of conductive contamination such as zinc
whiskers.
Gaseous v Copper: Class G1 as per ANSI/ISA 71.04-1985
3
v Silver: Corrosion rate of less than 300 in 30 days
1
ASHRAE 52.2-2008 - Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for
Removal Efficiency by Particle Size. Atlanta: American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and
Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.
2
The deliquescent relative humidity of particulate contamination is the relative humidity at
which the dust absorbs enough water to become wet and promote ionic conduction.
3
ANSI/ISA-71.04-1985. Environmental conditions for process measurement and control
systems: Airborne contaminants. Instrument Society of America, Research Triangle Park,
North Carolina, U.S.A.
Documentation format
The publications for this product are in Adobe Portable Document Format (PDF)
and should be compliant with accessibility standards. If you experience difficulties
when you use the PDF files and want to request a Web-based format or accessible
PDF document for a publication, direct your mail to the following address:
Information Development
IBM Corporation
205/A015
3039 E. Cornwallis Road
P.O. Box 12195
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27709-2195
Appendix B. Notices 313
U.S.A.
In the request, be sure to include the publication part number and title.
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or
distribute the information in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any
obligation to you.
Telecommunication regulatory statement
This product is not intended to be connected directly or indirectly by any means
whatsoever to interfaces of public telecommunications networks, nor is it intended
to be used in a public services network.
Electronic emission notices
Note: When attaching a monitor to the equipment, you must use the designated
monitor cable and any interference suppression devices supplied with the monitor.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) statement
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates,
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his own expense.
Properly shielded and grounded cables and connectors must be used in order to
meet FCC emission limits. IBM is not responsible for any radio or television
interference caused by using other than recommended cables and connectors or by
unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment. Unauthorized changes or
modifications could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Industry Canada Class A emission compliance statement
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Avis de conformit la rglementation d'Industrie Canada
Cet appareil numrique de la classe A est conforme la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Australia and New Zealand Class A statement
Attention: This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
314 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
European Union EMC Directive conformance statement
This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of EU Council
Directive 2004/108/EC on the approximation of the laws of the Member States
relating to electromagnetic compatibility. IBM cannot accept responsibility for any
failure to satisfy the protection requirements resulting from a nonrecommended
modification of the product, including the fitting of non-IBM option cards.
Attention: This is an EN 55022 Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to
take adequate measures.
Responsible manufacturer:
International Business Machines Corp.
New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
914-499-1900
European Community contact:
IBM Technical Regulations, Department M456
IBM-Allee 1, 71137 Ehningen, Germany
Telephone: +49 7032 15-2937
Email: [email protected]
Germany Class A statement
Deutschsprachiger EU Hinweis:
Hinweis fr Gerte der Klasse A EU-Richtlinie zur Elektromagnetischen
Vertrglichkeit
Dieses Produkt entspricht den Schutzanforderungen der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG
zur Angleichung der Rechtsvorschriften ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
in den EU-Mitgliedsstaaten und hlt die Grenzwerte der EN 55022 Klasse A ein.
Um dieses sicherzustellen, sind die Gerte wie in den Handbchern beschrieben zu
installieren und zu betreiben. Des Weiteren drfen auch nur von der IBM
empfohlene Kabel angeschlossen werden. IBM bernimmt keine Verantwortung fr
die Einhaltung der Schutzanforderungen, wenn das Produkt ohne Zustimmung der
IBM verndert bzw. wenn Erweiterungskomponenten von Fremdherstellern ohne
Empfehlung der IBM gesteckt/eingebaut werden.
EN 55022 Klasse A Gerte mssen mit folgendem Warnhinweis versehen werden:
Warnung: Dieses ist eine Einrichtung der Klasse A. Diese Einrichtung kann im
Wohnbereich Funk-Strungen verursachen; in diesem Fall kann vom Betreiber
verlangt werden, angemessene Manahmen zu ergreifen und dafr aufzukommen.
Deutschland: Einhaltung des Gesetzes ber die
elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten
Dieses Produkt entspricht dem Gesetz ber die elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit
von Gerten (EMVG). Dies ist die Umsetzung der EU-Richtlinie 2004/108/EG in
der Bundesrepublik Deutschland.
Appendix B. Notices 315
Zulassungsbescheinigung laut dem Deutschen Gesetz ber die
elektromagnetische Vertrglichkeit von Gerten (EMVG) (bzw. der
EMC EG Richtlinie 2004/108/EG) fr Gerte der Klasse A
Dieses Gert ist berechtigt, in bereinstimmung mit dem Deutschen EMVG das
EG-Konformittszeichen - CE - zu fhren.
Verantwortlich fr die Einhaltung der EMV Vorschriften ist der Hersteller:
International Business Machines Corp.
New Orchard Road
Armonk, New York 10504
914-499-1900
Der verantwortliche Ansprechpartner des Herstellers in der EU ist:
IBM Deutschland
Technical Regulations, Department M456
IBM-Allee 1, 71137 Ehningen, Germany
Telephone: +49 7032 15-2937
Email: [email protected]
Generelle Informationen:
Das Gert erfllt die Schutzanforderungen nach EN 55024 und EN 55022
Klasse A.
VCCI Class A statement
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic environment, radio
interference may occur, in which case the user may be required to take corrective
actions.
Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association
(JEITA) statement
Japanese Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA)
Confirmed Harmonics Guideline (products less than or equal to 20 A per phase)
Korean Class A warning statement
316 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Russia Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) Class A statement
People's Republic of China Class A electronic emission statement
Taiwan Class A compliance statement
Appendix B. Notices 317
318 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
Index
Numerics
2.5-inch disk drive backplane
installing 241
removing 239
2.5-inch drive cage
installing 252
removing 250
3.5-inch drive cage
installing 255
removing 253
3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane
removing 242
A
accessible documentation 313
adapter
boot option 200
installing 200
PCI bus, identification 200
removing 199
types and installation information 200
adapter, controller
remote battery
removing 143, 144
administrator password 290
Advanced Settings Utility (ASU), overview 301
air baffle 197, 198
ASM event log 24
assertion event, system-event log 24
assistance, getting 309
Attached Disk Test 65
attention notices 6
B
backplane connectors 20
battery
failure LED 82
installing 147
removing 146
battery, RAID adapter
removing 143
bays 7
before you install a legacy operating system 293
bezel
installing 227
removing 224
BIOS update failure 122
blue-screen capture feature
overview 297
boot selection menu program, using 292
C
cable routing, internal 149
cache 7
caution statements 6
checkout procedure 61, 62
Class A electronic emission notice 314
closing
power-supply cage 142
code updates 2
collecting data 1
configuration
cable routing 155
minimum 124
programs, LSI Configuration Utility 285
updating server 285
with ServerGuide 293
connector
Ethernet 12
power cord 11
serial 1 11
video 11
connector, systems-management Ethernet 11
connectors
extender cards 16
hard disk drive backplane 20
on rear of server 11
system board 15
connectors, USB
front 10
rear 12
contamination, particulate and gaseous 313
controller, configuring Ethernet 299
cover
installing 166
removing 166
CPU 1 error LED 81
CPU 2 error LED 82
CPU mismatch LED 82
creating, RAID array 301
CRUs, installing
air baffle 198
battery 147
bezel 227
DVD drive 188
fan cage assembly 229
fans 182
hot-swap hard disk drive 173
left-side cover 166
memory module 216
power supply 259
power-supply cage 140, 142
rear adapter-retention bracket 204
voltage regulator module 209
CRUs, removing
air baffle 197
battery 146
bezel 224
DVD drive 184
fan cage assembly 228
fans 182
hot-swap hard disk drive 171
Copyright IBM Corp. 2011 319
CRUs, removing (continued)
left-side cover 166
memory module 215
power supply 258
power-supply cage 140, 142
rear adapter-retention bracket 203
tape drive 231
USB cable and light path diagnostics
assembly 235, 237
voltage regulator module 208
customer replaceable units (CRUs) 128
D
danger statements 6
data collection 1
deassertion event, system-event log 24
diagnostic
error codes 86
on-board programs, starting 85
programs, overview 85
test log, viewing 86
text message format 85
tools, overview 23
dimensions 8
DIMM
installation sequence for memory mirroring 214
installing 211, 216
LED 81
problems 68
removing 215
DIMM installation sequence
for memory mirroring 215
display problems 71
documentation format 313
drive bays, internal 168
drives 7
bay 4, 5, 6, or 7
hot-swap, installing 177
hot-swap, removing 175
installing 168
removing 168
DSA
log 24, 86
preboot messages 86
DVD
cable routing 152
drive problems 63
drive, installing 188
drive, removing 184
error symptoms 63
DVD drive
activity LED 10
eject button 10
E
eject button
DVD 10
electrical input 9
electronic emission Class A notice 314
embedded hypervisor
using 296
environment 9
error codes and messages
diagnostic 86
IMM 35
POST 26
error symptoms
CD-ROM drive, DVD-ROM drive 63
general 64
hard disk drive 64
hypervisor flash device 65
intermittent 66
keyboard, non-USB 66
memory 68
microprocessor 70
monitor 71
mouse, non-USB 66
optional devices 73
pointing device, non-USB 66
power 74
serial port 75
ServerGuide 76
software 77
USB port 77
errors
format, diagnostic code 85
messages, diagnostic 85
Ethernet
activity LED 12
controller, configuring 299
controller, troubleshooting 123
enabling Broadcom utility 299
link status LED 12
Ethernet connector 12
event logs 23
expansion
bays 7
slots 7
extender card
installing 268
LEDs 19
removing 266
F
fan
hot-swap 7
installing 182
removing 182
fan cage
assembly, installing 229
assembly, removing 228
FCC Class A notice 314
features
IMM 295
remote presence 297
ServerGuide 293
field replaceable units (FRUs) 128
firmware
recovery from update failure 122
320 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
firmware (continued)
updates 292
updating 286
formatting a hard disk drive 301
FRUs, installing
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 241
2.5-inch drive cage 252
3.5-inch drive cage 255
adapter 200
extender card 268
heat-sink retention module 278
microprocessor 271
microprocessor retention module 280
operator information panel assembly 207
power-supply cage 263
system board 283
FRUs, removing
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 239
2.5-inch drive cage 250
3.5-inch drive cage 253
adapter 199
extender card 266
heat-sink retention module 277
microprocessor 269
microprocessor retention module 279
operator information panel assembly 205
power-supply cage 261
system board 281
G
gaseous contamination 313
general problems 64
getting help 309
gigabit Ethernet controller, configuring 299
grease, thermal 276
H
H8 heartbeat LED 83
hard disk drive
activity LED 10
backplane cabling 155
backplane connectors 20
diagnostic tests, types of 65
formatting 301
installing 173
problems 64
removing 171
types 173
hard disk drives
hot-swap SAS or SATA, installing 177
hot-swap SAS or SATA, removing 175
hardware service and support 310
heat output 9
heat-sink retention module
installing 278
removing 277
help, getting 309
hot-swap drives
SAS backplane LEDs 10
hot-swap drives (continued)
SAS/SATA backplane LEDs 10
hot-swap drives, SAS or SATA
installing 177
removing 175
humidity 9
hypervisor flash device
problems 65
I
IBM Advanced Settings Utility, overview 301
IBM Support Line 310
IBM Systems Director, updating 302
IMM
error messages 35
event log 24
heartbeat LED 83
using 295
important notices 6
installing
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 241
2.5-inch drive cage 252
3.5-inch drive cage 255
adapter 200
air baffle 198
battery 147
bezel 227
drives 168
DVD drive 188
extender card 268
fan cage assembly 229
fans 182
heat-sink retention module 278
hot-swap drives 177
hot-swap hard disk drive 173
hot-swap SAS or SATA drives 177
left-side cover 166
light path diagnostics assembly 237
memory 211
memory module 216
microprocessor 271
microprocessor retention module 280
operator information panel assembly 207
power supply 259
power-supply cage 263
rear adapter-retention bracket 204
SAS backplane 244
ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key 223
simple-swap backplate 248
system board 283
tape drive 233
the virtual media key 211
USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly 237
VRM 209
integrated functions 8
intermittent problems 66
internal cable routing 149
IP address, obtaining for Web interface 298
IPMI event log 23
Index 321
J
jumpers 17
K
keyboard problems 66
L
LEDs
DVD drive activity 10
Ethernet link status 12
Ethernet transmit/receive activity 12
extender cards 19
hard disk drive activity 10
hot-swap hard disk drive activity 10
hot-swap hard disk drive status 10
light path diagnostics, viewing without power 78
operator information panel 78
power-supply 13, 84
power-supply detected problems 12
rear of server 11
system board 19
system-error 10
LEDs, light path
battery failure 82
CPU 1 error 81
CPU 2 error 82
CPU mismatch 82
DIMM 81
H8 heartbeat 83
IMM heartbeat 83
PCI slot error 83
system board error 82
VRM failure 82
left-side cover
removing 166
legacy operating system
requirement 293
light path diagnostics
installing assembly 237
LEDs 78
power-supply LEDs 84
logs
system event message 35
LSI Configuration Utility
overview 299
starting 300
M
memory 7
installing 211
two-DIMM-per-channel (2DPC) 217, 219
memory mirroring
description 213
DIMM population sequence 214, 215
memory module
installing 216
removing 215
memory problems 68
memory sparing
description 214
memory sparing mode 214
menu choices in Setup utility 287
messages
diagnostic 85
diagnostic programs 23
diagnostic text 85
IMM error 35
POST error 23
POST event viewer 289
system-event 35
microprocessor 7
heat sink 273
installing 271
problems 70
removing 269
type and installation information 271
microprocessor retention module
installing 280
removing 279
minimum configuration 124
mirroring mode 213
monitor problems 71
mouse problems 66
N
noise emissions 8
notes 6
notes, important 312
notices 311
electronic emission 314
FCC, Class A 314
notices and statements 6
O
obtaining IP address for Web interface 298
online
publications 6
service request 4
opening
power-supply cage 140
operating system installation
with ServerGuide 294
without ServerGuide 294
operator information panel
assembly, installing 207
assembly, removing 205
cable routing 153
LEDs 78
optical drive power cable routing 149
optional device problems 73
ordering consumable parts 131
P
particulate contamination 313
parts listing 128
322 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
password
administrator 291
power-on 291
PCI
extender card slots 200
slot error LEDs 83
slots 200
PCI slots
extender cards 16
ports
Ethernet 12
serial 1 11
USB, front 10
USB, rear 12
video 11
POST
error codes 26
error messages 23
event log 23
event viewer 289
Watchdog Timer 288
power
cords 131
policy option 294
problems 74, 123
requirement 9
power supply 7
cage, closing 142
cage, installing 263
cage, opening 140
cage, removing 261
installing 259
LEDs 84
removing 258
power-cord connector 11
power-on
password 291
password setting 290
power-supply LEDs 13
power-supply LEDs and detected problems 12
problems
CD-ROM, DVD-ROM drive 63
DIMM 68
Ethernet controller 123
general 64
hard disk drive 64
hypervisor flash device 65
IMM 35
intermittent 66
memory 68
microprocessor 70
monitor 71
mouse 66
optional devices 73
POST 26
power 74, 123
serial port 75
ServerGuide 76
software 77
undetermined 124
USB port 77
public services network, use in 314
public telecommunications network, connection to 314
publications 5
R
RAID array, creating 301
rear adapter-retention bracket
installing 204
removing 203
recovering
BIOS update failure 122
UEFI update failure 122
remote presence feature
using 297
removing
2.5-inch disk drive backplane 239
2.5-inch drive cage 250
3.5-inch drive cage 253
3.5-inch hard disk drive backplane 242
3.5inch hot-swap drives 175
a RAID adapter battery 143, 144
adapter 199
air baffle 197
battery 146
bezel 224
drives 168
DVD drive 184
extender card 266
fan cage assembly 228
fans 182
heat-sink retention module 277
hot-swap hard disk drive 171
hot-swap SAS or SATA drives 175
left-side cover 166
light path diagnostics assembly 235
memory module 215
microprocessor 269
microprocessor retention module 279
operator information panel assembly 205
power supply 258
power-supply cage 261
rear adapter-retention bracket 203
ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key 221
simple-swap backplate 246
system board 281
tape drive 231
the virtual media key 210
USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly 235
voltage regulator module 208
RETAIN tips 3
S
safety information
Statement 13 xvi
Statement 15 xvi
SAS backplane
installing 244
LEDs
hot-swap drive status 10
Index 323
SAS or SATA hot-swap drives
installing 177
removing 175
SAS power cable routing 155
SAS/SATA backplane
LEDs
hot-swap drive activity 10
SATA backplane
activity LEDs for hot-swap drives 10
scan order 200
SCSI Attached Disk Test 65
serial
port problems 75
serial 1 connector 11
server
configuration, updating 285
firmware, starting backup 292
replaceable units 128
ServeRAID adapter advanced feature key
hypervisor 221
installing 223
ServerGuide
features 293
problems 76
using 292
using to install operating system 294
service
calling for 125
request, online 4
setup and configuration with ServerGuide 293
Setup utility
menu choices 287
starting 287
using 287
side cover
installing 166
simple-swap backplate
installing 248
removing 246
size 8
slots 7
software problems 77
software service and support 310
stabilizing feet, turning 257
starting
backup server firmware 292
LSI Configuration Utility 300
Setup utility 287
statements and notices 6
support, web site 309
switch block 6 switches 17
switches 17
system
event log 35
system board
external connectors 20
installing 283
internal connectors 15, 17
jumpers and switches 17
LEDs 19
removing 281
system board error LED 82
system-error LED 10
system-event log 23
Systems Director, updating 302
systems-management Ethernet connector 11
T
tape drive
cable routing 149
installing 233
removing 231
test 116
telephone numbers 310
temperature 9
test log, viewing 86
tests, hard disk drive diagnostic 65
thermal grease 276
tier 1 CRUs 166
tier 2 CRUs 205
tools, diagnostic 23
trademarks 311
troubleshooting procedures 3
troubleshooting tables 63
turning, stabilizing feet 257
two-DIMM-per-channel (2DPC)
requirements 219
U
UEFI update failure 122
UltraSlim DVD
cable routing 152, 153
undetermined problems 124
undocumented problems 4
United States electronic emission Class A notice 314
United States FCC Class A notice 314
Universal Serial Bus (USB) problems 77
UpdateXpress 3
updating
firmware 286
IBM Systems Director 302
server configuration 285
USB
port problems 77
USB cable and light path diagnostics assembly
installing 237
removing 235
USB connectors
front 10
rear 12
using
boot selection menu program 292
embedded hypervisor 296
LSI Configuration Utility 299
remote presence feature 297
ServerGuide 292
Setup utility 287
the remote presence feature 297
324 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide
V
video
connector 11
problems 71
viewing event logs 24
virtual media key
installing 211
removing 210
VMware Hypervisor support 285
voltage regulator module
installing 209
removing 208
VRM
failure LED 82
installation 275
installing 209
removing 208
W
Web interface
obtaining IP address 298
web site
publication ordering 309
ServerGuide 292
support 309
support line, telephone numbers 310
weight 8
Index 325
326 IBM System x3400 M3 Type 7378/7379: Problem Determination and Service Guide

Part Number: 81Y6298


Printed in USA
(1P) P/N: 81Y6298

You might also like